670155
14
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/232
Pagina verder
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
i7700
Instruction Manual
A-6937H-1EX-ta
Printed in Japan
© 2011–2014 Icom Inc.
i
FOREWORD
Thank you for making the IC-7700 your radio of choice. We hope you agree
with Icom’s philosophy of “technology first. Many hours of research and devel-
opment went into the design of your IC-7700.
D FEATURES
Ultimate receiver performance: third-order intercept (IP3) of
+40 dBm (HF bands only)
Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK31 modulator/demodulator
and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RTTY and
PSK31 operations without a PC
High resolution spectrum scope center frequency and fixed
frequency modes, plus mini-scope displays
IMPORTANT
READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at-
tempting to operate the transceiver.
SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains important
safety and operating instructions for the IC-7700.
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS
TRADEMARKS
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom
Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United Kingdom,
Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries.
An LCD filter has been added to European versions for Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and Radio
Frequency interference (RFI) compliance purpose. In some instances, the LCD may be a little difficult to see,
but this is normal and does not indicate an LCD malfunction.
FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
•Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.
•Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
•Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
WORD DEFINITION
R DANGER! Personaldeath,seriousinjuryoranexplosionmayoccur.
R WARNING! Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may occur.
CAUTION Equipment damage may occur.
NOTE Recommended for optimum use. No risk of personal inju-
ry, fire or electric shock.
ii
PRECAUTIONS
R DANGER HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER
attach an antenna or internal antenna connector
during transmission. This may result in an electrical
shock or burn.
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver
with a headset or other audio accessories at high vol-
umelevels.Hearingexpertsadviseagainstcontinu-
oushighvolumeoperation.Ifyouexperiencearinging
in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use.
R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the
transceiver with wet hands. This may result in an elec-
tric shock or damage to the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other ob-
jects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors
on the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock.
R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver
power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an
abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom
dealer or distributor for advice.
CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver in any un-
stable place (such as on a slanted surface or vibrated
place). This may cause injury and/or damage to the
transceiver.
CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver’s rear
panel side down after lifting up the transceiver by
holding rack mounting handle. This may scratch the
surface of the place or damage the connectors on the
transceiver’s rear panel.
CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings
of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver per-
formance and/or damage to the transceiver.
In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits,
such as output power, idling current, etc., might dam-
agetheexpensivefinaldevices.
The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob-
lems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment.
CAUTION: NEVER block any cooling vents on the
top, rear or bottom of the transceiver.
CAUTION: NEVERexposethetransceivertorain,
snow or any liquids.
CAUTION: NEVER install the transceiver in a
place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation
may be reduced, and the transceiver may be dam-
aged.
CAUTION:Thetransceiverweighsapproximately
22.5 kg (50 lb). Always have two people available to
carry, lift or turn over the transceiver.
CAUTION: The line-voltage receptacle must be
near the transceiver and must be easily accessible.
Avoidextensioncords.
DO NOT
use harsh solvents such as benzine or al-
cohol when cleaning, as they can damage the trans-
ceiver’s surfaces.
DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-
ally desire to transmit.
DO NOT use or store the transceiver in areas with
temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C
(+122°F).
DO NOTplacethetransceiverinexcessivelydusty
environments or in direct sunlight.
DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or
putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may
overheat the transceiver.
Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadvert-
ent use by children.
BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the
transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear
amplifier’smaximuminputlevel,otherwise,thelinear
amplifier will be damaged.
BE CAREFUL! touch the transceiver top cover when
transmitting continuously for long periods of time. The
top cover may be hot.
Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional).
Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin
assignments, and connection to the IC-7700 may
damage the transceiver or microphone.
The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections
that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a
malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of
LCD displays.
During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans-
ceiver and microphone as far away as possible from
the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-
ous indications.
Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-
connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when
you will not use the transceiver for long period of time.
For U.S.A. only
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device,
notexpresslyapprovedbyIcomInc.,couldvoidyour
authority to operate this device under FCC regula-
tions.
q AC power cable* ................................................. 1
w Feet .............................................................. 1 pair
e Spare fuse (FGB 2 A) ......................................... 1
r RCA plugs ........................................................... 2
t DC plug ............................................................... 1
y 2-conductor 18 plugs ......................................... 3
u 3-conductor 18 plugs ......................................... 2
i 3-conductor 14 plugs ......................................... 3
o ACC plugs (7-pin) ............................................... 1
!0 ACC plugs (8-pin) ............................................... 1
!1 Antenna connector caps ..................................... 4
!2 Side screws (without rack mounting handle) ..... 6
!3 Main dial ............................................................. 1
!4 Rubber cover for the Main dial ............................ 1
!5 Main dial screw ................................................... 1
!6Hexagonalwrench .............................................. 1
* May differ from that shown depending on the version.
These screws are used when removing the rack mounting
handles. See p.2-3 for the rack mounting handle detach-
ment details.
See p.2-2 for the main dial attachment details.
iii
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
q
!0 !1 !2
!3 !4 !5 !56
yui
o
ewr
t
!2
!3
(FH M4×12 mm)
(PH M4×8 mm) PH: Pan head
FH: Flat head
iv
Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel ........................................................................................ 1-2
Rear panel ...................................................................................... 1-12
LCD display .................................................................................... 1-14
Screen menu arrangement ............................................................. 1-16
Section 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Unpacking ......................................................................................... 2-2
Main dial attachment ........................................................................ 2-2
Rack mounting handle detachment .................................................. 2-3
Selecting a location .......................................................................... 2-3
Grounding ......................................................................................... 2-4
Antenna connection .......................................................................... 2-4
USB flash drive connection .............................................................. 2-4
Required connections ....................................................................... 2-5
D Front panel ................................................................................... 2-5
D Rear panel .................................................................................... 2-5
Advanced connections ..................................................................... 2-6
D Front panel ................................................................................... 2-6
D Rear panel—1 .............................................................................. 2-6
D Rear panel—2 .............................................................................. 2-7
Linear amplifier connections ............................................................. 2-8
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO .................................................... 2-8
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier ........................................ 2-8
Transverter jack information ............................................................. 2-9
FSKandAFSK(SSTV)connections ................................................ 2-9
Microphones (options) .................................................................... 2-10
D SM-50 ......................................................................................... 2-10
D SM-30 ......................................................................................... 2-10
D HM-36 ......................................................................................... 2-11
Microphone connector information ................................................. 2-11
Accessory connector information ................................................... 2-12
Section 3 BASIC OPERATIONS
When first applying power (CPU resetting) ...................................... 3-2
Initial settings .................................................................................... 3-2
SelectingVFO/memorymode .......................................................... 3-3
VFOselection ................................................................................... 3-3
DSelectingVFO-A/VFO-B ............................................................... 3-3
DVFOequalization .......................................................................... 3-3
Selecting an operating band ............................................................. 3-4
D Using the band stacking registers ................................................ 3-4
Frequency setting ............................................................................. 3-5
D Tuning with the main dial .............................................................. 3-5
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad ........................................ 3-5
D Quick tuning step .......................................................................... 3-6
D Selecting “kHz” step ..................................................................... 3-6
D 14 tuning step function ................................................................. 3-6
D Selecting 1 Hz step ...................................................................... 3-7
D Auto tuning step function .............................................................. 3-7
Operating mode selection ................................................................ 3-8
Volumesetting .................................................................................. 3-9
RF gain adjustment .......................................................................... 3-9
Squelch level adjustment .................................................................. 3-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Meter indication selection ............................................................... 3-10
D Multi-function digital meter ......................................................... 3-10
D Meter type selection ................................................................... 3-11
Voicesynthesizeroperation ............................................................ 3-11
Basic transmit operation ................................................................. 3-12
D Transmitting ................................................................................ 3-12
D Microphone gain adjustment ...................................................... 3-12
D Drive gain adjustment ................................................................. 3-13
Band edge warning beep ............................................................... 3-13
D Programming the user band edge .............................................. 3-14
Section 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating SSB .................................................................................. 4-2
D Convenient functions for receive ...................................................4-2
D Convenient functions for transmit ..................................................4-3
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) .........................4-3
Operating CW ................................................................................... 4-4
D Convenient functions for receive ...................................................4-4
D Convenient functions for transmit ..................................................4-5
D About CW reverse mode ...............................................................4-5
D About CW pitch control .................................................................4-5
D CW side tone function ...................................................................4-5
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation .................................................4-6
Electronic keyer functions ................................................................. 4-7
D Memory keyer screen ....................................................................4-8
D Editing a memory keyer .................................................................4-9
D Contest number set mode ...........................................................4-10
D Keyer set mode ...........................................................................4-11
Operating RTTY (FSK) ................................................................... 4-13
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-14
D About RTTY reverse mode ..........................................................4-14
D Twin peak filter .............................................................................4-14
D Functions for the RTTY decoder display .....................................4-15
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............................................4-15
D RTTY memory transmission ........................................................4-16
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ....................................4-16
D Editing RTTY memory .................................................................4-17
D RTTY decode set mode ..............................................................4-18
D Data saving ..................................................................................4-20
Operating PSK ................................................................................ 4-21
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-22
D About BPSK and QPSK modes ..................................................4-22
D Functions for the PSK decoder display .......................................4-23
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............................................4-23
D PSK memory transmission ..........................................................4-24
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ....................................4-24
D Editing PSK memory ...................................................................4-25
D PSK decode set mode ................................................................4-26
D Data saving ..................................................................................4-28
Operating AM ................................................................................. 4-29
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-29
D Convenient functions for transmit ................................................4-30
Operating FM .................................................................................. 4-31
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-31
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
vi
D Convenient functions for transmit ................................................4-31
Repeater operation ......................................................................... 4-32
D Repeater access tone frequency setting .....................................4-33
Tone squelch operation .................................................................. 4-34
Data mode (AFSK) operation ......................................................... 4-35
Section 5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Spectrum scope screen .................................................................... 5-2
D Center mode ................................................................................. 5-2
DFixedmode ................................................................................... 5-3
D Mini scope screen display ............................................................ 5-4
D Scope set mode ........................................................................... 5-4
D USB mouse operation .................................................................. 5-9
Preamplifier .................................................................................... 5-10
Attenuator ....................................................................................... 5-10
RIT function .................................................................................... 5-11
D RIT monitor function ....................................................................5-11
AGC function .................................................................................. 5-12
D Selecting the preset value ...........................................................5-12
D Adjusting the AGC time constant ................................................5-12
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ...............................5-12
Twin PBT operation ........................................................................ 5-13
IF filter selection ............................................................................. 5-14
D IF filter selection ......................................................................... 5-14
DFilterpassbandwidthsetting(exceptFMmode) ....................... 5-14
D Roofing filter selection ................................................................ 5-15
D DSP filter shape ......................................................................... 5-15
D Filter shape set mode ................................................................. 5-15
Noise blanker .................................................................................. 5-16
D NB set mode ............................................................................... 5-17
Noise reduction ............................................................................... 5-18
Dial lock function ............................................................................ 5-18
Notch function ................................................................................. 5-19
Digital selector ................................................................................ 5-19
Audio scope screen ........................................................................ 5-20
D Audio scope set mode ................................................................ 5-21
Autotune function ............................................................................ 5-22
Section 6 FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
VOXfunction ..................................................................................... 6-2
DUsingtheVOXfunction ................................................................ 6-2
DAdjustingtheVOXfunction ........................................................... 6-2
DVOXsetmode .............................................................................. 6-2
Break-in function ............................................................................... 6-3
D Semi break-in operation ............................................................... 6-3
D Full break-in operation .................................................................. 6-3
TX function ..................................................................................... 6-4
D TX monitor function .................................................................... 6-4
Monitor function ................................................................................ 6-4
Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ............................................. 6-5
Speech compressor (SSB only) ........................................................ 6-5
Split frequency operation .................................................................. 6-6
Quick split function ........................................................................... 6-7
D Split lock function ......................................................................... 6-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 7 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Recording a QSO audio ……………………………………………… 7-2
D To start or stop recording …………………………………………… 7-2
Recording quick operation …………………………………………… 7-2
D To start or stop recording …………………………………………… 7-2
Playing back recorded audio (QSO) ………………………………… 7-3
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-3
D Operating while playing back ……………………………………… 7-4
Deleting recorded audio file …………………………………………… 7-5
Deleting recorded audio folder ………………………………………… 7-5
About digital voice recorder …………………………………………… 7-6
Recording a received audio (Short REC) …………………………… 7-7
D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-7
Playing back the recorded audio (Short REC) ……………………… 7-7
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-7
D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-8
Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-8
Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-8
Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-9
D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-9
D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-9
Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-10
Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-11
D Single TX ……………………………………………………………… 7-11
D Repeat TX …………………………………………………………… 7-11
D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-12
Voicesetmode ………………………………………………………… 7-12
Saving a voice memory into the memory device …………………… 7-15
D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-15
D Saving the TX memory ……………………………………………… 7-15
Section 8 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channels ............................................................................. 8-2
Memory channel selection ................................................................ 8-2
D Using the / keys ......................................................... 8-2
D Using the keypad .......................................................................... 8-2
Memory channel programming ......................................................... 8-3
DProgramminginVFOmode .......................................................... 8-3
D Programming in memory mode .................................................... 8-3
Frequency transfers .......................................................................... 8-4
DTransferringinVFOmode ............................................................. 8-4
D Transferring in memory mode ....................................................... 8-4
Memory list screen ........................................................................... 8-5
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen ........ 8-5
D Confirming programmed memory channels ................................. 8-5
Memory names ................................................................................. 8-6
D Editing (programming) memory names ........................................ 8-6
Memory clearing ............................................................................... 8-6
Memo pads ........................................................................................ 8-7
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads ......... 8-7
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad .................................... 8-7
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
viii
Section 9 SCANS
Scan types ........................................................................................ 9-2
Preparation ....................................................................................... 9-2
Voicesquelchcontrolfunction .......................................................... 9-3
Scan set mode ................................................................................. 9-3
Programmed scan operation ............................................................ 9-4
F scan operation ............................................................................ 9-4
Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan .............................................. 9-5
Memory scan operation .................................................................... 9-6
Select memory scan operation ......................................................... 9-6
Setting select memory channels ...................................................... 9-7
D Setting in scan screen .................................................................. 9-7
D Setting in memory list screen ....................................................... 9-7
D Erasing the select scan setting .................................................... 9-7
Tone scan ......................................................................................... 9-8
Section 10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Antenna connection and selection ................................................. 10-2
Antenna memory settings ............................................................... 10-3
D Antenna type selection ............................................................... 10-3
D Temporary memory .................................................................... 10-4
D Antenna selection mode ............................................................. 10-4
D Receive antenna I/O setting ....................................................... 10-5
Antenna tuner operation ................................................................. 10-6
D Tuner operation ........................................................................... 10-6
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna .......................................... 10-7
Section 11 CLOCK AND TIMERS
Time set mode ................................................................................ 11-2
Daily timer setting ........................................................................... 11-3
Setting sleep timer .......................................................................... 11-4
Timer operation .............................................................................. 11-4
Section 12 SET MODE
Set mode description ...................................................................... 12-2
D Set mode operation .................................................................... 12-2
D Screen arrangement ................................................................... 12-3
Level set mode ............................................................................... 12-4
ACC set mode ................................................................................ 12-7
Display set mode .......................................................................... 12-10
Others set mode ........................................................................... 12-12
USB-Memory set menu ................................................................ 12-23
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement ..................................... 12-23
D Save option set mode ............................................................... 12-24
D Load option set mode ............................................................... 12-25
File saving .................................................................................... 12-26
File loading ................................................................................... 12-27
Changing a file name ................................................................... 12-28
Deleting a file ................................................................................ 12-29
Unmounting USB flash drive ........................................................ 12-29
Formatting USB flash drive .......................................................... 12-30
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 13 MAINTENANCE
Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 13-2
D Transceiver power ....................................................................... 13-2
D Transmit and receive .................................................................. 13-2
D Scanning ..................................................................................... 13-3
D Display ........................................................................................ 13-3
D Format USB flash drive .............................................................. 13-3
Main dial brake adjustment ............................................................ 13-3
SWR reading .................................................................................. 13-4
Screen type and font selections ..................................................... 13-4
Frequencycalibration(approximate) .............................................. 13-5
Opening the transceiver’s case ...................................................... 13-6
Clock backup battery replacement ................................................. 13-6
Fuse replacement ........................................................................... 13-7
Resetting the CPU .......................................................................... 13-7
About protection indications ........................................................... 13-8
Screen saver function ..................................................................... 13-8
Section 14 CONTROL COMMAND
Remotejack(CI-V)information ...................................................... 14-2
DCI-Vconnectionexample ........................................................... 14-2
D Data format ................................................................................. 14-2
D Command table .......................................................................... 14-3
D Data contents description .......................................................... 14-10
Section 15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
Specifications ................................................................................. 15-2
D General ....................................................................................... 15-2
D Transmitter .................................................................................. 15-2
D Receiver ...................................................................................... 15-3
D Antenna tuner ............................................................................. 15-3
Options ........................................................................................... 15-4
Section 16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
General ........................................................................................... 16-2
D Firmware confirmation ................................................................ 16-2
Caution ........................................................................................... 16-2
Preparation ..................................................................................... 16-3
D Firmware and firm utility ............................................................. 16-3
D File downloading ....................................................................... 16-3
Firmware update— USB flash drive ............................................... 16-4
Firmware update— PC ................................................................... 16-6
D Connections ................................................................................ 16-6
D IP address setting ....................................................................... 16-7
D Updating from a PC .................................................................... 16-8
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1
PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1
Front panel ........................................................................................ 1-2
Rear panel ...................................................................................... 1-12
LCD display .................................................................................... 1-14
Screen menu arrangement ............................................................. 1-16
1-2
q POWER SWITCH POWER (p. 3-2)
Push to turn the transceiver power ON.
The[POWER]indicatorabovethisswitchlights
green when powered ON.
Hold down for 1 second to turn the transceiver
power OFF.
The[POWER]indicatorlightsorangewhenthe
transceiver is OFF when the internal power supply
is switched ON.
w TRANSMIT SWITCH TRANSMIT
Selects transmit or receive.
•The[TX]indicatorlightsredwhiletransmittingandthe
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open.
e ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH TUNER (p. 10-6)
Turns the internal antenna tuner ON or OFF (by-
pass) when pushed momentarily.
The[TUNER]indicatorabovethisswitchlights
green when the tuner is turned ON, goes off when
tuner is turned OFF (bypassed).
Tunes the antenna tuner manually when held
down for 1 second.
•The[TUNER]indicatorblinksredduringmanualtun-
ing.
•Whenthetunercannottunetheantenna,thetuning
circuit is automatically bypassed after 20 seconds.
r TIMER SWITCH TIMER (p. 11-4)
Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON or
OFF.
•The[TIMER]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen
when the timer is in use.
Selects the timer set mode when held down for
1 second.
t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]
Accepts standard stereo headphones.
•Outputpower:5mWwithan8Ω load.
•Whenheadphonesareconnected,theinternalspeaker
orconnectedexternalspeakerdoesnotfunction.
y ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] (p. 2-5)
Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic
keyer for CW operation.
•Youcanselectinternalelectronickeyer,bug-keyor
straight key operation in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
•Astraightkeyjackislocatedontherearpanel.See
[CW KEY] on page 1-12.
•Keyerpolarity(dotanddash)canbereversedinkeyer
set mode. (p. 4-12)
•A4-channelmemorykeyerisavailableforyourcon-
venience. (p. 4-8)
(dot)
(com)
(dash)
Turn the internal power supply ON first. The in-
ternal power supply switch is located on the rear
panel. (p. 3-2)
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
AGC SQL NR NB
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
!5
io!0 !1 !2 !3 !4
!6
Front panel
1-3
u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]
Accepts an optional microphone.
•Seepage15-4forappropriatemicrophones.
•Seepage2-10formicrophoneconnectorinformation.
i MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC] (p. 3-12)
Adjusts microphone input gain.
•ThetransmitaudiotoneintheSSB,AMandFMmodes
can be adjusted independently in set mode. (p. 12-5)
How to set the microphone gain.
Set the [MIC] control so that the ALC meter occasionally
moves up-scale during normal voice transmission, in the
SSB, AM or FM mode.
o VOX SWITCH VOX
PushtoturntheVOXfunctionONorOFFdur-
ing SSB, AM and FM mode operation. (p. 6-2)
Holddownfor1secondtoenterVOXsetmode.
(p. 6-2)
What is the VOX function?
TheVOXfunction(voiceoperatedtransmission)acti-
vates transmission without pushing the transmit switch
or PTT switch when you speak into the microphone; then
automatically returns to receive when you stop speaking.
!0 RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. 3-12)
Continuously varies the RF output power from a
minimumof5W*toamaximumof 200 W*.
*AM mode: 5 W to 50 W
!1 BREAK-IN SWITCH BK-IN
Push to turn the break-in function ON (semi-break-
in, full-break-in) or OFF during CW mode operation.
(p. 6-3)
What is the break-in function?
The break-in function switches transmit and receive with
CW keying. Full break-in (QSK) can monitor the receive
signal between CW dots and dashes.
!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL
[KEY SPEED] (p. 4-4)
Adjusts keying speed for the internal electronic CW
keyer.
•6wpm(minimum)to48wpm(maximum)istheadjust-
able range.
!3 MONITOR SWITCH MONITOR (p. 6-4)
Monitors your transmitted IF signal.
•TheCWsidetonefunctionsregardlessof MONITOR
switch setting in the CW mode.
The[MONITOR]indicatorabovethisswitchlights
green while the function is activated.
!4 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY] (p. 6-3)
Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay
time for CW semi-break-in operations.
!5 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (p. 5-12)
Adjusts the continuously-variable AGC circuit time
constant.
•Touse[AGC]control,push AGCVR ([AGCVR]indi-
cator lights).
!6 SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL]
(outer control; p. 3-9)
Adjusts the squelch threshold level. The squelch
mutes noise output from the speaker (closed con-
dition) when no signal is received.
•ThesquelchisparticularlyeffectiveforFM.Itisalso
available in other modes.
•The11to12o’clockpositionisrecommendedforthe
most effective use of the [SQL] control.
Deep
Deep
Noise squelch
Squelch
threshold
Shallow
Shallow
S-meter
squelch
Squelch is
open
Slow
Fast
Long delay for
slow speed keying
Short delay for
high speed keying
Max.
48 wpm
Min.
6 wpm
Increases
Decreases
Recommended level for
an Icom microphone
Decreases
Decreases Increases
Increases
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-4
!7 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]
(inner control; p. 5-18)
Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the
noisereductionfunctionisinuse.Setformaximum
readability.
•Tousethiscontrol,push NR .
!8 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB]
(outer control; p. 5-17)
Adjust the noise blanker threshold level.
•Tousethiscontrol,push NB .
!9 AGC VOLUME SWITCH AGC VR (p. 5-12)
➥
Push to toggle [AGC] control usage ON or OFF.
•Use[AGC]controltosettheAGCtimeconstant,
when switched ON.
The[AGCVR]indicatorabovethisswitchlights
green when the control is ON.
➥ Turns the AGC function OFF when held down
for 1 second.
@0 USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR [USB]
(p. 2-4)
Insert USB flash drive* for both reading and
storing a wide variety of the transceiver’s infor-
mation and data.
•Theindicatorabovetheconnectorslightsorblinks
when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory
data.
•Anunmountoperationshouldbeperformedbefore
removing the USB flash drive* (p.12-29).
Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK31
operations.
•USBkeyboards*aresupported.
*: A USB flash drive or USB keyboard is not supplied
by Icom.
Deep
Shallow
Increases
Decreases
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
!7
!8
!9 @2 @3 @5 #2@6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1@4@0 @1
Front panel (continued)
About the [USB] connector:
•SupportedonlyUSBflashdrive,keyboard,mouse
or hub.
•KEEP the transceiver power OFF when connecting
or disconnecting a USB keyboard, mouse or hub.
•DO NOT connect the following devices:
- Two or more the same kind of USB devices.
(Example:TwoUSBhubsortwoUSBmouses)
- Multimedia adapter
- USB HDD
- Larger than 32 GB USB flash drives
- Bluetooth® keyboard or mouse.
1-5
@1 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH NR (p. 5-18)
Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON or OFF.
•The[NR]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreenwhen
the function is activated.
@2 AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 3-9)
Varies theaudiooutputlevelofthespeakeror
headphones.
Audio output
increases
Audio output
decreases
@3 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; p. 3-9)
Adjusts the RF gain level.
While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear
noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Sensitivity
increases
Sensitivity
decreases
@4 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH NB (p. 5-17)
Switches the noise blanker ON or OFF when
pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type
noise such as that generated by automobile ig-
nition systems. This function cannot be used in
the FM mode, or on non-pulse-type noise.
•The[NB]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen
while the function is activated.
➥ Enters the blanking-width set mode when held
down for 1 second.
@5 DRIVE GAIN CONTROL [DRIVE] (p. 3-13)
Adjusts the transmitter level at the driver stage.
Active in all modes (other than the SSB mode with
[COMP] OFF).
Decreases
Increases
Push
@6 COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL [COMP]
(p. 6-5)
Adjusts the speech compression level in SSB.
Compression
gain decreases
Compression
gain increases
Push
@7 MONITOR GAIN CONTROL [MONI GAIN] (p. 6-4)
Adjusts the transmit IF signal monitor level.
Monitor gain
decreases
Monitor gain
increases
Push
@8 VOX GAIN CONTROL [VOX GAIN] (p. 6-2)
Adjusts the transmit and receive switching thresh-
oldlevelforVOXoperation.
Low
sensitivity
High
sensitivity
Push
@9 ANTI VOX CONTROL [ANTI VOX] (p. 6-2)
AdjuststheVOXsensitivitytothespeakeraudio,to
preventunwantedVOXactivation.
‘More sensitive’
and confirm proper operation
‘Less sensitive’
and confirm
proper operation
Push
#0 LCD CONTRAST CONTROL [CONTRAST]
Adjusts the LCD contrast.
Low
contrast
High
contrast
Push
#1 LCD BRIGHTNESS CONTROL [BRIGHT]
Adjusts the LCD brightness.
Darker
Brighter
Push
#2 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTOTUNE]
(p. 5-22)
Turns the automatic tuning function ON or OFF in
the CW and AM modes.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-6
#3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES
Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD
display to the right of these switches.
•Functionsvarydependingontheoperatingcondition.
MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH)
➥ Selects the antenna connector from
ANT1, ANT2, ANT3 and ANT4 when
pushed. (p. 10-2)
➥ Displays the antenna selection mem-
ory when held down for 1 second.
•Whenthereceiveantennaisactivated,
the antenna connected to [ANT4] is
used for receive only.
When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]
doesnotfunctionand‘TRV’appears.
MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)
➥ Selects the RF power (Po), SWR,
ALC,COMP,Vd or Id metering func-
tions during transmit. (p. 3-10)
➥ Switches the multi-function digital
meter ON or OFF when held down for
1 second. (p. 3-10)
MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH)
➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps
or bypasses them. (p. 5-10)
•“P.AMP1”activates10dBpreamp.
P.AMP2”activates16dBhigh-gain
preamp.
➥ Turns the preamp function OFF when
held down for 1 second. (p. 5-10)
What is the preamp?
The preamp amplifies signals in the receiver front end to
improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1” or “P.
AMP2” when receiving weak signals.
MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH)
➥ Selects a 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB at-
tenuator when pushed. (p. 5-10)
➥
Turns the attenuator function OFF
when held down for 1 second. (p. 5-10)
What is the attenuator?
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being dis-
torted when very strong signals are near the desired fre-
quency, or when very strong electromagnetic fields, such
as from a broadcasting station, are near your location.
ATT
OFF
P.AMP
1
METER
Po
ANT
1
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
#3 #4 #5 #6 #8#7 #9 $0 $1 $2
Front panel (continued)
1-7
MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH)
➥ Activates and selects a fast, mid
or slow AGC time constant when
pushed. (p. 5-12)
•IntheFMmode,only“FAST”isavailable.
➥ Selects the AGC set mode when held
down for 1 second. (p. 5-12)
The AGC time constant can be set be-
tween 0.1 and 8.0 seconds (depending
on the mode), or turned OFF. When the
AGC is “OFF, the S-meter does not
function.
What is the AGC?
The AGC controls the receiver gain to produce a con-
stant audio output level, even when the received signal
strength varies dramatically. Select “FAST” for tuning and
then select “MID” or “SLOW, depending on the receiving
condition.
MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)
➥ Turns the speech compressor ON or
OFF in the SSB mode. (p. 6-5)
➥ Switches the compression between
narrow, mid or wide when held down
for 1 second.
What is the speech compressor?
The speech compressor compresses the transmitter
audio input to increase the average audio output level,
to increase talk power. This function is effective for long-
distance communication or when propagation conditions
are poor.
➥ Turns the 14-speed tuning function
ON or OFF in the SSB data, CW,
RTTY and PSK modes. (p. 3-6)
•
14 function sets dial rotation to 14 of
normal speed for fine tuning.
➥ Switches between the tone encoder,
tone squelch function and no-tone op-
eration when pushed in the FM mode.
(pp. 4-33, 4-34)
➥ Selects the tone set mode when held
down for 1 second in the FM mode.
(pp. 4-33, 4-34)
MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH)
➥ Switches the voice squelch control
function ON or OFF; useful for scan-
ning. (p. 9-3)
#4 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES F-1 F-7
Push to select the function indicated in the LCD
display above these switches.
•Functionsvary,dependingontheoperatingcondition.
#5 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]
Lights red while transmitting.
#6 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX]
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the
squelch is open.
#7 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-14)
Shows the operating frequency, function switch
menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list
screen, set mode settings, etc.
#8 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT]
Lights during split frequency operation.
#9 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 5-18)
Lights when the dial lock function is activated.
$0 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH
[XFC] (p. 6-6)
Monitors the transmit frequency (including TX
frequency offset) when held down during split fre-
quency operation.
•Whilepushingthisswitch,thetransmitfrequencycan
be changed with the main dial, keypad, memo pad or
/ switches.
•WhenthesplitlockfunctionisturnedON,pushing
[XFC] cancels the dial lock function. (p. 6-7)
$1 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES /
(p. 8-2)
Push to select the desired memory channel.
MemorychannelscanbeselectedbothinVFOand
memory modes.
$2 KEYPAD
Pushing a key selects the operating band.
(p. 3-4)
•
GENE selects the general coverage band.
Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up
other stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 3-4)
•Icom’striplebandstackingregistermemorizes3fre-
quencies in each band.
After pushing F-INP
ENT , enters a frequency or
memory channel. Pushing F-INP
ENT or /
is necessary to end the entry. (pp. 3-5,
8-2)
•Toenter14.195MHz,push F-INP
ENT 1.8 1 10 4
GENE 1.8 1 28 9 14 5 F-INP
ENT .
VSC
OFF
TONE
OFF
1
/
4
ON
COMP
OFF
WIDE
AGC
MID
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-8
$3 MODE SWITCHES
Selects the desired mode. (p. 3-8)
•Announcesselectedmodeviathespeechsynthesizer.
(p. 12-15)
SSB Selects USB and LSB modes alter-
nately.
CW Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse)
modes alternately.
RTTY/PSK Switches between RTTY and PSK
mode.
 Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY
reverse) mode when held down for 1
second in RTTY mode.
 Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK re-
verse) mode when held down for 1
second in PSK mode.
AM/FM Selects AM and FM modes alternately.
DATA Selects SSB, AM or FM data mode
(USB-D, LSB-D, AM-D, FM-D) when
pushed in SSB, AM or FM mode, re-
spectively.
 Switches D1, D2 and D3 when held
down for 1 second.
$4 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]
Turns the quick tuning step ON or OFF. (p. 3-6)
•Whilethequicktuningindicator,“Z,is displayed
above the frequency display, the frequency can be
changed in programmed kHz steps.
•0.1,1,5,9,10,12.5,20and25kHzstepsareavail-
able for each operating mode independently.
When the quick tuning step is OFF, hold down
for 1 second to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON or
OFF. (p. 3-7)
When the quick tuning step is ON, hold down
for 1 second to enter quick tuning step set
mode. (p. 3-6)
$5 VFO SELECT SWITCH A/B
PushtoselectbetweenVFO-AandVFO-B.
•Switchesbetweentransmitfrequencyandreceivefre-
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 6-6)
$6 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH MW (p. 8-3)
Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when
held down for 1 second.
ThisfunctionisavailablebothinVFOandmemory
modes.
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
$5 $7 $8 $9 %0 %2$6
%8 %9%7 ^0
$4 %1
%4 %5
$3
%6%3
Front panel (continued)
1-9
$7 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH MP-W (p. 8-7)
Programs the displayed readout frequency and op-
erating mode into a memo pad.
•The5mostrecententriesremaininmemopads.
•Thememopadcapacitycanbeexpandedfrom5to10
in set mode. (p. 12-15)
$8 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH MP-R (p. 8-7)
Each push calls up a frequency and operating
mode in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently
programmed frequencies and operating modes
can be recalled, starting from the most recent.
•Thememopadcapacitycanbeexpandedfrom5to10
in set mode. (p. 12-15)
$9 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH V/M
Switches the selected readout operating mode
betweentheVFOandmemorywhenpushed.
(pp. 3-3, 8-2)
TransfersthememorycontentstoVFOwhen
held down for 1 second. (p. 8-4)
%0 VFO EQUALIZING SWITCH A=B (p. 3-3)
TransfersthedisplayedVFOfrequency(VFO-Aor
VFO-B)totheundisplayedVFOfrequency(VFO-B
orVFO-A)whenhelddownfor1second.
%1 FILTER SWITCH FILTER (p. 5-14)
Selects one of 3 IF filter settings.
Enters the filter set screen when held down for
1 second.
%2 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER
SWITCH APF/TPF
During CW mode operation (p. 4-6)
Push to turn the audio peak filter ON or OFF.
•“
APF
appears when audio peak filter is in use.
Hold down for 1 second to select the APF pass-
band width from WIDE, MID and NAR or from
320, 160 and 80 Hz depending on APF type
setting.
During RTTY mode operation (p. 4-14)
Push to turn the twin peak filter ON or OFF.
•“
TPF
appears when twin peak filter is in use.
%3 MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH M.SCOPE
(p. 5-4)
Push to turn the mini spectrum scope screen
ON or OFF.
Theminispectrumscopescreencanbedisplayed
with another screen, such as memory or set mode
screen, simultaneously.
Hold down for 1 second to turn ON the spec-
trum scope screen.
%4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH REC
Push to record the previous received signal for
the preset time period. (p. 7-7)
•Thepresettimeperiodcanbesetinvoicesetmode.
(p. 7-13)
Hold down for 1 second to record a QSO (Com-
munication) audio onto a memory device. (p. 7-2)
•Holddownthisswitchfor1secondtostoprecord-
ing.
%5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH PLAY
(p. 7-4)
Plays back the previously recorded audio for the
preset time period when pushed.
Plays back all of the previously recorded audio
when held down for 1 second.
%6 EXIT/SET SWITCH EXIT/SET
Pushtoexit,orreturntothepreviousscreen
display during spectrum scope, memory, scan
or set mode screen display.
Displays set mode menu screen when held
down for 1 second.
%7 MAIN DIAL
Changes the displayed frequency, selects set
mode setting, etc.
%8 LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (p. 5-18)
Push to switch the dial lock function ON or OFF.
%9 SPEECH SWITCH SPEECH (p. 3-11)
Push to announce the S-meter indication and
the selected frequency.
The selected operating mode is additionally an-
nounced when held down for 1 second.
^0 SPLIT SWITCH SPLIT (p. 6-6)
Turns the split function ON or OFF when
pushed.
Turns the split function ON. When held down for
1 second in non-FM modes, transfers the unse-
lectedVFO’sreadoutfrequencytotheselected
VFO’sreadoutandsetstheunselectedVFOto
transmitVFO.(Quick split function)
•Theoffsetfrequencyisshiftedfromtheselected
VFOfrequencyinFMmode.(p.12-13)
•ThequicksplitfunctioncanbeturnedOFFusingset
mode. (p. 12-13)
Turns the split function ON and shifts the unse-
lectedVFOfrequencyafterinputtinganoffset.
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1-10
^1 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT]
(p. 5-13)
Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter “passband width” via
the DSP.
•Passbandwidthandshiftfrequencyaredisplayedin
the multi-function display.
•Holddown PBT-CLR for 1 second to clear the PBT
settings.
•ThePBTisadjustablein50HzstepsintheSSB/CW/
RTTY/PSK modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode. In this
time, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in the SSB/
CW/RTTY/PSK modes, and 100 Hz in the AM mode.
•ThesecontrolsfunctionasanIFshiftcontrol.
What is the PBT control?
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF pass-
band width to reject interference. This transceiver uses
the DSP circuit for the PBT function.
PBT2
PBT1
Low cutHigh cut Center
–+
^2 PBT CLEAR SWITCH PBT-CLR (p. 5-13)
Clears the PBT settings when held down for 1 sec-
ond.
•The[PBT-CLR]indicatorabovethisswitchlightswhen
PBT is in use.
^3 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR SWITCH DIGI-SEL
(p. 5-19)
Turns the digital RF selector ON or OFF.
•The[DIGI-SEL]indicatorlightsgreenwhentheprese-
lector is in use.
^4 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]
(p. 5-18)
Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency.
•Thecontrolcanbereassignedastheaudiopeakfilter
adjustment (p. 12-15)
Higher
frequency
Lower
frequency
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
&1 &0 ^9
^1
^2
^3
^4
^5
^6
^7
^8
Front panel (continued)
1-11
^5 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]
(outer control; p. 5-19)
Variesthenotchfrequencyofthemanualnotch
filter to reject an interfering signal while the manual
notch function is ON.
•Notchfiltercenterfrequency:
SSB : –1060 Hz to 4040 Hz
CW : CW pitch freq. + 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq.
–2540 Hz
AM : –5100 Hz to 5100 Hz
^6 NOTCH SWITCH NOTCH (p. 5-19)
Switches the notch function between auto, man-
ual and OFF in the SSB and AM modes.
Turns the manual notch function ON or OFF
when pushed in the CW, RTTY and PSK31
mode.
Turns the auto notch function ON or OFF when
pushed in FM mode.
•“
MN
appears when manual notch is in use.
•“
AN
appears when auto notch is in use.
Switches the manual notch characteristics from
wide, middle and narrow when held down for 1
second.
What is the notch function?
The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un-
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-
sired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts
the notch frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted
tones.
^7 RIT/TX CONTROL [RIT/TX] (pp. 5-11, 6-4)
Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency with-
out changing the transmit and/or receive frequency
shownonthemainVFO.
•Rotatethecontrolclockwisetoincreasethefrequency,
or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the
frequency. The RIT or TX functions must be ON.
•Theshiftfrequencyrangeis±9.999kHzin1Hzsteps
(or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).
^8 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (p. 4-5)
Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW
side tone pitch without changing the operating fre-
quency.
^9 RIT SWITCH RIT (p. 5-11)
Tur ns the RIT function ON or OFF when
pushed.
•Use[RIT/TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.
Adds the RIT shift frequency to the operating
frequency when held down for 1 second.
What is the RIT function?
Receiver incremental tuning (RIT) shifts the receive fre-
quency without shifting the transmit frequency.
This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off-fre-
quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-
sounding voice characteristics, etc.
&0 CLEAR SWITCH CLEAR (pp. 5-11, 6-4)
Clears the RIT/TX shift frequency when held
down for 1 second or when pushed momentarily,
depending on the quick RIT/TX clear function
setting (p. 12-15).
&1 TX SWITCH TX (p. 6-4)
Turns the TX function ON or OFF when
pushed.
•Use[RIT/TX] control to vary the TX frequency.
Adds the TX shift frequency to the operating
frequency when held down for 1 second.
What is the TX function?
TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency
operation in CW, etc.
High
frequency
Low
frequency
Frequency
increases
Frequency
decreases
Higher
frequency
Lower
frequency
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
q ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT 1] (p. 2-5)
w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT 2] (p. 2-5)
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3 [ANT 3] (p. 2-5)
r ANTENNA CONNECTOR 4 [ANT 4] (p. 2-5)
Accept a 50 Ω antenna with a PL-259 plug con-
nector.
t GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-4)
Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent elec-
tricalshocks,TVI,BCIandotherproblems.
y CIRCUIT BREAKER
Cuts off the AC input when over-current occurs.
u EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL
[EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 2-7)
Connectstoanexternaldisplaymonitor.
•Atleast800×600pixeldisplayisnecessary.
i ETHERNET CONNECTOR [LAN] (p. 16-6)
Connects to a PC through a LAN (Local Area Net-
work).
o CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(pp. 2-6, 14-2)
Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 c i -v l e v e l
c o n v e r t e r forexternalcontrolofthetransceiver.
Used for transceive operation with another Icom
CI-Vtransceiverorreceiver.
!0 RS-232C TERMINAL [RS-232C] (p. 2-6)
Connects an RS-232C cable, D-sub 9-pin to con-
nect the IC-7700 to a PC.
Can be used to remotely control the IC-7700
without the optional CT-17, or for RTTY/PSK31
decoded signal output. The [RS-232C] interface is
wired as a modem (DCE).
!1 MAIN POWER SWITCH [I/O] (p. 3-2)
Turns the internal power supply ON or OFF.
!2 AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 2-5)
Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC
line-voltage receptacle.
!3 REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT
TERMINAL [REF I/O]
Inputs/outputs a 10 MHz reference signal.
!4 STRAIGHT KEY JACK [CW KEY] (p. 2-5)
Acceptsastraightkeyorexternalelectronickeyer
with 14 inch standard plug.
[ELEC-KEY]onthefrontpanelcanbeusedfora
straightkeyorexternalelectronickeyer.Deactivatethe
internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
1-12
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
ALC
ADJ
ALCRELAYCW KEY
EXT
KEYPAD
METER
DC OUT
15V
MAX1A
REF I/O
10MHz
-
10dBm
INOUT
REMOTE RS
-
232C
EXT
-
DISPLAY
RX ANT
INOUT
S/P DIF
12
ACC
EXT
-
SP
ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4
GND
AC
15A
I
X
-
VERTER
u i o !0
!4 !3!5!6!7!8!9@0@1@2@3@4@5@6@7@8
!1
!2
t yqwer
Rear panel
(+)
(_)
1-13
!5 S/P DIF INPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– IN] (p. 2-7)
!6 S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– OUT]
(p. 2-7)
ConnectsexternalequipmentthatsupportsS/P
DIF input/output.
!7 ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT [ALC ADJ]
Adjusts the ALC levels.
No adjustment is required when the ALC output
level of a connected non-Icom linear amplifier is 0
to–4VaDC.
!8 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 2-8)
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-
ear amplifier.
!9 T/R CONTROL JACK [RELAY] (p. 2-8)
Connects to ground when transmitting to control an
externalunit,suchasanon-Icomlinearamplifier.
@0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]
@1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2]
Enableconnectionofexternalequipmentsuchas
a linear amplifier, an automatic antenna selector/
tuner, a TNC for data communications, and so on.
•Seepage2-11forsocketinformation.
@2
EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP]
(p. 2-6)
Connectsanexternalspeaker(4–8Ω), if desired.
@3 EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK [EXT KEYPAD]
(p. 2-7)
Connectsanexternalkeypadfordirectvoicemem-
ory or electronic keyer control.
Transceiver mute control line (both transmit and
receive) is also supported.
@4 METER JACK [METER] (p. 2-7)
Outputs a signal showing received signal strength,
transmitoutputpower,VSWR,ALC,speechcom-
pression,Vd or Idlevelforexternalmeterindica-
tion.
@5 DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUT] (p. 2-7)
Outputsaregulated14VDC(approximately)for
externalequipment.Connectedinparallelwith
13.8Voutputsof[ACC1]and[ACC2].(maximum
1 A in total)
@6 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]
(p. 2-6)
Externaltransverterinput/outputconnector.
Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or
when the transverter function is in use. (pp. 2-11)
@7 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT– IN]
@8 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT– OUT]
Located between the transmit/receive switching
circuit and receiver’s RF stage.
Connectsanexternalunit,suchaspreamplifieror
RF filter, using BNC connectors, if desired.
Whennoexternalunitisconnected,[RXANT–
IN] and [RX ANT OUT] must be deactivated
and shorted by the switching relay internally. This
setting is available on the antenna set screen.
(p. 10-5)
NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be
lowerthan 16VDC/0.5A(or 250V AC,
200 mA with MOSFET switching).
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Receiver
Transmitter
IN
[RX ANT]
OUT
Transmit/Receive
switching circuit
ANT
+
_
_
q S/RF METER (pp. 3-10, 3-11)
Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows
the relative output power, SWR, ALC or compres-
sion levels while transmitting.
•Atotalof3metertypesareavailable.
w SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 5-13)
Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.
e BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-13)
Shows the passband width of the IF filter.
r BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR
Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is
selected during CW, RTTY or PSK31 operation.
t PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-13)
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-
eration.
y NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 5-19)
appears when the manual notch function
is in use. This function is available in SSB, CW,
RTTY, PSK and AM modes.
appears when the auto notch function is
in use. This function is available in SSB, AM
and FM modes.
u RTTY TUNING INDICATOR
Shows the tuning condition in RTTY mode.
1-14
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
qu
!1
!5
!6
!7
oetwyri!0
@1
@3
@2
@5
@4
@6
!8
!4
!3
!9
@0
!2
LCD display
S
Po
13579
250W200100 150500
+20 +40 +60dB
S
Po
13579
250W200100 15050
0
10
+20 +40 +60dB
• Standard meter
• Edgewise meter
• Bar meter
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
1-15
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
i APF/TPF INDICATOR
appears when the audio peak filter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in CW
mode. (p. 4-6)
appears when the twin peak filter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in RTTY
mode. (p. 4-14)
o CLOCK READOUT
Shows the current time. Local and UTC time can
be indicated at the same time.
!0 USB-MEMORY INDICATOR
Appears when USB flash drive is connected and
blinks while reading or writing the USB flash drive.
!1 RIT INDICATOR
Appears when RIT function is in use.
!2 TX INDICATOR
Appears when TX function is in use.
!3 LAN INDICATOR
Appears when the Remote station access the trans-
ceiver through the LAN. (An optional RS-BA1 is re-
quired.)
!4 RIT/TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR
Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or TX func-
tion.
!5 IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 5-14)
Shows the selected IF filter number.
!6 QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 3-6)
Appears when the quick tuning step function is in
use.
!7 FREQUENCY READOUTS
Shows the operating frequency.
!8 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN
Shows the screens for the multi-function digital
meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory
list, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK de-
coder, IF filter selection or set modes, etc.
!9 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE
Indicates the function of the LCD function switches
( F-1 F-7 ).
@0 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS
Shows the selected memory channel contents
inVFOmode.
ShowstheVFOcontentsinmemorymode.
@1 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE
Indicates the function of the multi-function
switches.
@2 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 9-7)
Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as
a select memory channel.
@3 SELECT ANTENNA INDICATOR
Indicates the selected antenna.
@4 TX INDICATOR
TX
appears while transmitting.
Indicates the frequency readout for transmit.
•Appearsonthesubreadoutwhenthesplitfunction
is turned ON.
•ATXindicatorwithdotedrectangle,
TX
is dis-
played, instead of the regular “
TX
TX indicator,
when a frequency outside of an amateur band
frequency range is selected. This function can be
turned OFF in set mode, if desired. (pp. 3-13, 12-12)
@4 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 3-3)
IndicatestheVFOmodeorselectedmemorychan-
nel number.
@5 MODE INDICATOR
Shows the selected mode.
1-16
1PANEL DESCRIPTION
The following screens can be selected from the start
up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-
lowing chart.
Pushing EXIT/SET several times returns to the start
up screen. See page 12-3 for set mode arrangement.
• Spectrum scope screen (p. 5-2)
Voice recorder screen (p. 7-3)
• RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 4-13)
• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 4-8)
• Memory list screen (p. 8-5)
• PSK31 decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 4-21)
• Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 9-4)
• Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 9-6)
• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)
F-1 F-2 F-3
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-2 F-5
• Audio scope screen (p. 5-20)
F-6F-3
F-7F-3
F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
Screen menu arrangement
2-1
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 2
Unpacking ......................................................................................... 2-2
Main dial attachment ........................................................................ 2-2
Rack mounting handle detachment .................................................. 2-3
Selecting a location .......................................................................... 2-3
Grounding ......................................................................................... 2-4
Antenna connection .......................................................................... 2-4
USB flash drive connection .............................................................. 2-4
Required connections ....................................................................... 2-5
D Front panel ................................................................................... 2-5
D Rear panel .................................................................................... 2-5
Advanced connections ..................................................................... 2-6
D Front panel ................................................................................... 2-6
D Rear panel—1 .............................................................................. 2-6
D Rear panel—2 .............................................................................. 2-7
Linear amplifier connections ............................................................. 2-8
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO .................................................... 2-8
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier ........................................ 2-8
Transverter jack information ............................................................. 2-9
FSKandAFSK(SSTV)connections ................................................ 2-9
Microphones (options) .................................................................... 2-10
D SM-50 ......................................................................................... 2-10
D SM-30 ......................................................................................... 2-10
D HM-36 ......................................................................................... 2-11
Microphone connector information ................................................. 2-11
Accessory connector information ................................................... 2-12
CAUTION: The transceiver weighs approximately 22.5 kg
(50 lb). Always have two people available to
carry, lift or turn over the transceiver.
2-2
Unpacking
After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the
delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons.
For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-
ment included with the IC-7700, see ‘Supplied acces-
sories’ on page iii of this manual.
Main dial attachment
The main dial is shipped unattached to the transceiver
to prevent possible damage to the dial shaft or rotary
encoder during shipping. Please attach the dial as de-
scribed below.
q Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right position
(Fig. 1).
•Thedialbrakesmoveinwardasshown.
w Insert the main dial set-screw into the screw hole of
the main dial, then tighten the screw until the screw
extendsintotheshaftholeoutslightlyusingsup-
pliedhexagonalwrench(2mm)(Fig.2).
•Becarefulthatthescrewdoesnotextendoutmorethan
1 mm (0.04 in).
e Attach the main dial as illustrated (Fig. 3).
•Becarefultomatchthecorrectorientationoftheflat
face of the shaft and the screw hole of the dial knob.
rTightenthescrewusingsuppliedhexagonalwrench
as illustrated (Fig. 3).
t Install the rubber cover to the main dial (Fig. 4) little
by little.
•Becarefultomatchthecorrectpositionoftheconvex
part of the rubber cover and the concave part of the dial
knob.
•Neverinstalltherubbercoveronthemaindialbyforce.
This may cause damage to the dial shaft or rotary en-
coder.
y Then adjust the main dial brake as desired.
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Dial brake adjustment
Fig. 1
q
Shorter than
1 mm (0.04 in)
Fig. 2
w
w
Fig. 3
er
CAUTION: NEVER hold any controller knob(s),
such as the main dial, when carrying or lifting the
transceiver. This will damage the dial shaft or rotary
encoder.
Once attaching the rubber cover to the main dial,
it’s hard to remove. When you remove the rubber
cover from main dial, be careful to lack your nails
and/or damage to the transceiver.
Fig. 4
Side view
t
Front side
2-3
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Rack mounting handle detachment
The rack mounting handles are supplied attached to
the transceiver to stabilize the transceiver in the shock
absorbermaterialinthebox.Ifyouwanttoremove
them, use the supplied screws as described below.
qRemovethesixscrewsfromtherackmounting
handles on both side and remove the rack mount-
ing handles.
wTightenthesuppliedsixscrews(PHM4×8) on both
sides of the front panel and side panel.
When re-packing and shipping the transceiver:
Attach the rack mounting handles using original
screws when re-packing and shipping the transceiver
at any time.
Selecting a location
Select a location for the transceiver that allows ad-
equateaircirculation,freefromextremeheat,cold,
orvibrations,andawayfromTVsets,TVantennaele-
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.
The base of the transceiver has adjustable feet for
desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles de-
pending on your operating preference.
q
w
PH: Pan head
FH: Flat head
FH M4 × 15 mm
FH M4 × 9 mm
PH M4 × 8 mm
2-4
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Grounding
To prevent electrical shock, television interference
(TVI),broadcastinterference(BCI)andotherprob-
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND
terminal on the rear panel.
For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap
to a long ground rod. Make the distance between the
[GND] terminal and ground as short as possible.
R WARNING! NEVER connect the [GND] ter-
minal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connection
couldcauseanexplosionorelectricshock.
Antenna connection
For radio communications, the antenna is of critical
importance, along with output power and receiver
sensitivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched
50 Ω antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or
betterofVoltageStandingWaveRatio(VSWR)on
your operating bands. The transmission line should be
acoaxialcable.
When using a single antenna, use the [ANT1] con-
nector.
CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from light-
ning by using a lightning arrestor.
USB flash drive connection
Connect the USB flash drive* to the USB connector.
•Unmountoperationisrecommendedbeforeremovingthe
USB flash drive* (p.12-25).
Make sure to connect the USB flash drive correctly.
NEVER connect or remove the USB flash drive
when the read/write indicator lights or blinks.
A USB keyboard* or USB hub* can also be con-
nected to the USB connector.
*: USB flash drive, USB keyboard or USB hub is not sup-
plied by Icom.
Antenna SWR
Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency
range and SWR may be increased out-of-range.
WhentheSWRishigherthanapproximately2.0:1,
the transceiver’s power drops to protect the final
transistors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful to
match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows
full power for transmitting. The IC-7700 has an SWR
meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously.
PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
30 mm 1.18 in 10 mm 0.39 in 1–2 mm 0.04–0.08 in
30 mm
10 mm (soft solder)
10 mm
1–2 mm
solder solder
Soft
solder
Coupling ring
Slide the coupling ring
onto the cable. Strip
the cable jacket and
tin the braid.
Slide the connector
body on and solder it.
Screw the coupling
ring onto the
connector body.
Strip the cable as
shown at left. Tin the
center conductor.
q
w
e
r
or
2-5
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Required connections
D Front panel
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
Microphones (p. 2-10)
CW key
A straight or bug key can also be used when the
keyer type is changed in keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
Connects an electronic keyer.
Optional
SM-50
Optional
HM-36
Optional
SM-30
D Rear panel
ALC
ADJ
ALCRELAYCW KEY
EXT
KEYPAD
METER
DC OUT
15V
MAX1A
REF I/O
10MHz
-
10dBm
INOU T
REMOTE RS
-
232C
EXT
-
DISPLAY
RX ANT
INOUT
S/P DIF
12
ACC
EXT
-
SP
ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4
GND
AC
15A
I
X
-
VERTER
Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-4) Straight key
Ground (p. 2-4) Use the heaviest gauge wire or
strap available and make the
connection as short as possible.
Grounding prevents electrical
shocks, TVI and other problems.
AC outlet
R WARNING!
Use the supplied
AC power cable
only.
NOTE: Attach the supplied
antenna connector cap when
no antenna or external equip-
ment is connected.
ANT1 for 1.8–18 MHz bands, ANT 2 for 21–28 MHz bands
ANT3 for 50 MHz band, ANT 4 for receive antenna.
>Example]:
2-6
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Advanced connections
D Front panel
ALC
ADJ
ALCRELAYCW KEY
EXT
KEYPAD
METER
DC OUT
15V
MAX1A
REF I/O
10MHz
-
10dBm
INOU T
REMOTE RS
-
232C
EXT
-
DISPLAY
RX ANT
INOUT
S/P DIF
12
ACC
EXT
-
SP
ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4
GND
AC
15A
I
X
-
VERTER
RX ANT IN/OUT
Connects an external
preamp or lowpass filter.
RX ANT IN/OUT must be
activated in the antenna
set screen (p.10-5).
ACC sockets
(pp. 2-9, 2-11)
Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 2-8)
Connects a linear amplifier,
antenna selector, etc.
[X-VERTER]
Connects a transverter
for VHF, UHF or other
band use.
[RELAY], [ALC] (p. 2-8)
Used for connecting a
non-Icom linear amplifier.
External speaker (p. 15-4)
[REMOTE], [RS-232C] (p. 14-2)
Used for computer control and transceive operation.
The optional CT-17 is required when connecting a
PC to [REMOTE].
SP-34
(option)
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MIC RF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1F-2 F-3F-4 F-5F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
MIC
Headphones
USB-Memory
The AFSK modulation signal can be
input (p. 2-9), or an external keypad
can also be connected to [MIC] (p. 2-7).
Keyboard
Connects an USB type PC keyboard
directly for RTTY/PSK31 operation,
as well as other text edit operations.
D Rear panel— 1
2-7
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
D Rear panel— 2
ALC
ADJ
ALCRELAYCW KEY
EXT
KEYPAD
METER
DC OUT
15V
MAX1A
REF I/O
10MHz
-
10dBm
INOU T
REMOTE RS
-
232C
EXT
-
DISPLAY
RX ANT
INOUT
S/P DIF
12
ACC
EXT
-
SP
ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 3 ANT 4
GND
AC
15A
I
X
-
VERTER
External Display
Connects a PC-style
monitor display (at least
800×600 resolution).
Video output signal can
be turned ON and OFF
in set mode (p. 12-11)
[DC OUT]
Outputs regulated 14 V
(approximately) DC for exter-
nal equipment power supply.
(maximum 1 A capacity)
External keypad
Connects an external keypad for direct voice
memory, keyer memory, RTTY TX memory and
PSK TX memory controls.
Connects a PC for audio
signal data (48 kHz, 16-bit)
input/output.
[S/P DIF IN/OUT]
Connects a PC
for remote control
through a LAN or
the Internet using
the RS-BA1, or
for updating the
CPU firmware.
Ethernet connector (p. 16-6)
1.5 k
±5%
1.5 k
±5%
2.2 k
±5%
4.7 k
±5%
S1
(T1/M1
RT1/PT1)
S2
(T2/M2
RT2/PT2)
S3
(T3/M3
RT3/PT3)
S4
(T4/M4
RT4/PT4)
EXTERNAL KEYPAD
3.5 (d) mm; 1/8" plug
Mute switch: Mutes both transmis-
sion and reception when switched
ON during transceive operation.
[METER]
Connects an external meter, etc.
3.5 (d) mm; 1/8" plug
Output impedance : 4.7 k
Output voltage (open circuit) : 2.5 V (default)
Output voltage can be adjusted 0 to 5 V
in ACC set mode (p. 12-8)
An external keypad can also
be connected to the [MIC]
connector on the front panel.
q
w
ert
y
u
i
Front panel view
[MIC]
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier
R WARNING!
Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-
fier ALC output level after referring to the linear
amplifier instruction manual.
TheALCinputlevelmustbeintherange0Vto
–4V.Thetransceiverdoesnotacceptpositivevolt-
age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings
could overheat or damage the linear amplifier.
The maximum signal level of [RELAY] jack is
16V/0.5ADCwithinitialsetting,and250V/200mA
with “MOSFET” setting (see page 12-8 for details).
Useanexternalrelayunitifyournon-Icomlinear
amplifier requires control voltage and/or current
greater than specified.
When using a linear amplifier that has a time delay
between receiving and transmitting, a high SWR
might cause the linear amplifier to malfunction. To
prevent this, slow the TX Delay the “TX Delay (HF),
(50M)” settings in the Others Set mode.
(pp. 12-12, 12-13)
SET > OTHERS > TX Delay (HF), (50M)
Linear amplifier connections
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO
2-8
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
RF OUTPUT RF INPUT
SEND
ALC
50
coaxial cable
TransceiverANT1
ALC
RELAY
To an
antenna
Non-Icom linear amplifier
To an
antenna
ACC-1
ANT
ANT2
ANT1
ACC 2
INPUT1
INPUT2
REMOTE
EXCITER
11&2
GND
GND
IC-PW1/EURO
AC outlet
(Non-European versions : 100–120/200–240 V
European version : 230 V)
Ground
Transceiver
REMOTE
Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
Be sure to connect the cable
to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.
Coaxial cable
(supplied with the
IC-PW1/EURO)
Coaxial cable*
*Optional
Connect
[INPUT2]
if necessary
2-9
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Transverter jack information
When2to13.8Visappliedtopin6of[ACC2],the
[X-VERTER]connectorisactivatedfortransverterop-
eration and the antenna connectors do not receive or
transmit any signals.
Whilereceiving,[X-VERTER]connectorcanbeac-
tivatedasaninputterminalfromanexternaltrans-
verter.
Whiletransmitting,the[X-VERTER]connectorout-
puts signals of the displayed frequency at –20 dBm
(22mV)assignalsfortheexternaltransverter.
FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections
To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the
diagram below.
Connect to serial port, parallel
port, speaker jack, microphone
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.
See the instruction manual of
the application for details.
D AFSK operation
When connecting to [ACC 1]
When connecting to [MIC]
When using a PC application
When using a TNC
PC
RS-232C
TNC or scan converter
PTT
Audio output
AF input
GND
AFSK output
AF input
GND
PTT*
SQL input
*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction
manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).
When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).
q
w
ert
y
u
i
1
2
3
45
67
8
z
z
x
x
c
c
v
v*
z
x
c
v
z
x
c
v
b
b
n
n
b
n
Rear panel view
Front panel view
PC
RS-232C
TNC or scan converter
Connect to serial port, parallel
port, speaker jack, microphone
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.
See the instruction manual of the
application for details.
D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]
• When using a PC application
• When using a TNC
1
2
3
45
67
8
Rear panel view
Rear panel view
RTTY
GND
AF
SEND
RTTY
GND
AF
SEND
RTTY OUTPUT
GND
AUDIO INPUT
PTT
RTTY OUTPUT
GND
AUDIO INPUT
PTT
1
2
3
45
67
8
Transverter connector
2-10
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
q PTT SWITCH
Hold down to transmit, release to receive.
w PTT LOCK SWITCH
Push to lock the PTT switch in the transmit mode.
e UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
Change the selected readout frequency or memory
channel.
•Holding down continuously changes the frequency or
memory channel number.
•Whileholdingdown[XFC],thetransmitreadoutfrequen-
cy can be controlled while in the split frequency mode.
•The[UP]/[DN]switchcansimulateakeypaddle.Preset
in the keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
r LOW CUT SWITCH
Push (SM-50)/Slide (SM-30) to cut out the low fre-
quency components of input voice signals.
t PTT LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK]
(Only for the SM-30)
Lights red when the PTT lock switch (w) is ON.
y MIC GAIN VOLUME [MIC GAIN]
Rotate to adjust the microphone output level.
•Usethiscontrolasanadditiontothemicrophonegain
setting of the connected transceiver.
Rotating the control too far clockwise may result
in an output level that is too high and transmit
signal distortion.
q
r
w
e
DSM-50
DSM-30
qw
t
MIC GAIN
ONOFF
LOW CUT
yr
MIC GAIN
y
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
Microphones (options)
2-11
Microphone connector information
(Front panel view)
CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this
candamagetheinternal8Vregulator.DCvoltage
is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation. Use
caution when using a non-Icom microphone.
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
[MIC] FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Pin No.
w +8VDCoutput Max.10mA
e
Frequency up Ground
Frequency down Ground through 470 Ω
r Squelch open “Low” level
Squelch closed “High” level
y GND (PTT ground)
t PTT
r Squelch switch
q Microphone input
w +8 V DC output
e Frequency up/down
u GND
(Microphone ground)
i AF output (varies with [AF])
D HM-36 w
q
q PTT SWITCH
Hold down to transmit; release to receive.
w UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
Change the selected readout frequency or memory
channel.
•Holding down continuously changes the frequency or
memory channel number.
•Whileholdingdown[XFC],thetransmitreadoutfrequen-
cy can be controlled while in the split frequency mode.
•The[UP]/[DN]switchcansimulateakeypaddle.Preset
in the keyer set mode. (p. 4-12)
2-12
2INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Accessory connector information
NOTE: If the CW side tone level limit or beep level limit is in use, the CW side tone or beep tone decreases
fromthefixedlevelwhenthe[AF]controlisrotatedaboveaspecifiedlevel.(p.12-6)
1
2
3
45
67
8
ACC 1 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1RTTY Controls RTTY keying
“High level”
“High level”
Output current
:Morethan2.4V
:Lessthan0.6V
: Less than 2 mA
2 GND Connects to ground.
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2. ———
3 SEND*
Input/output
pin.
Connected in
parallel with
ACC 2 pin 3.
An external equipment
controls the transceiver.
When this pin goes low,
the transceiver transmits.
Input voltage (High)
Input voltage (Low)
Current flow
:2.0Vto20.0V
:–0.5Vto0.8V
:Max.20mA
The transceiver outputs
alowsignaltocontrolex-
ternal equipment.
Output voltage (Low)
Current flow
:Lessthan0.1V
:Max.200mA
4 MOD Modulator input.
Connects to a modulator.
Input impedance
Output level
: 10 kΩ
:
Approximately100mVrms
5 AF
AF detector output.
Fixed level, regardless of [AF] position
in
default settings. (see notes below)
Output impedance
Output level
: 4.7 kΩ
:100–300mVrms
6 SQLS Squelch output.
Grounded when squelch opens.
SQL open
SQL closed
:Lessthan0.3V/5mA
:Morethan6.0V/100µA
713.8V 13.8VoutputwhenpowerisON.
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7. Output current :Maximum1A
8 ALC ALC voltage input.
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5.
Control voltage
Input impedance
:–4Vto0V
: More than 10 kΩ
1
2
3
45
67
ACC 2 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
18V Regulated8Voutput. Output voltage
Output current
: 8V±0.3V
: Less than 10 mA
2 GND Same as ACC 1 pin 2.
3 SEND* Same as ACC 1 pin 3.
4 BAND Band voltage output.
(Varieswithamateurband) Output voltage :0Vto8.0V
5 ALC Same as ACC 1 pin 8.
6TRV Activates[X-VERTER]input/output
when “HIGH” voltage is applied
Input impedance
Input voltage
: More than 10 kΩ
:2Vto13.8V
713.8V Same as ACC 1 pin 7.
* When the SEND terminal controls the inductive load (such as a relay), a counter-electromotive force can cause
the transceiver’s malfunction or damage. To prevent this, we recommend adding a switching diode, such as an
“1SS133, on the load side of the circuit to the counter-electromotive force absorption.
When the diode is added, a switching delay of the relay may occur. Be sure to check its switching action before
operation.
e SEND
u 13.8 V
ACC 1/2
sockets
Relay
Switching diode To a non-Icom
linear amplifier
[Example]
3-1
BASIC OPERATIONS Section 3
When first applying power (CPU resetting) ...................................... 3-2
Initial settings .................................................................................... 3-2
SelectingVFO/memorymode .......................................................... 3-3
VFOselection ................................................................................... 3-3
DSelectingVFO-A/VFO-B ............................................................... 3-3
DVFOequalization .......................................................................... 3-3
Selecting an operating band ............................................................. 3-4
D Using the band stacking registers ................................................ 3-4
Frequency setting ............................................................................. 3-5
D Tuning with the main dial .............................................................. 3-5
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad ........................................ 3-5
D Quick tuning step .......................................................................... 3-6
D Selecting “kHz” step ..................................................................... 3-6
D 14 tuning step function ................................................................. 3-6
D Selecting 1 Hz step ...................................................................... 3-7
D Auto tuning step function .............................................................. 3-7
Operating mode selection ................................................................ 3-8
Volumesetting .................................................................................. 3-9
RF gain adjustment .......................................................................... 3-9
Squelch level adjustment .................................................................. 3-9
Meter indication selection ............................................................... 3-10
D Multi-function digital meter ......................................................... 3-10
D Meter type selection ................................................................... 3-11
Voicesynthesizeroperation ............................................................ 3-11
Basic transmit operation ................................................................. 3-12
D Transmitting ................................................................................ 3-12
D Microphone gain adjustment ...................................................... 3-12
D Drive gain adjustment ................................................................. 3-13
Band edge warning beep ............................................................... 3-13
D Programming the user band edge .............................................. 3-14
3-2
When first applying power (CPU resetting)
Before first applying power, make sure all connections
required for your system are complete by referring to
Section 2. Then, reset the transceiver using the fol-
lowing procedure.
Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in
memory channels and returns programmed values
in set mode to default values.
q Turn the main power ON with [I/O] on the rear
panel.
•ThetransceiverpowerisstillOFFandthepowerindi-
cator lights orange.
w While holding down F-INP
ENT and MW , push
POWER to turn power ON.
•TheCPUisreset.
•TheCPUstart-uptakesapproximately5seconds.
ThetransceiverdisplaysitsinitialVFOfrequencies
when resetting is complete.
e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired.
In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark
and unstable after turning power ON. This is normal
and does not indicate any equipment malfunction.
3BASIC OPERATIONS
POWER
TUNER
TIMER
VOX
SSB CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM DATA AUTO
TUNE
LOCK
TS
XFC
M.SCOPE
EXIT/SET
REC
PLAY
VOICE MEMORYBRIGHTCONTRASTVOX GAINMONI GAINCOMPDRIVE ANTI VOX
BK-IN MONITOR
TRANSMIT
MIC
ELEC-KEY
PHONES
AF RF
MICRF
PWR
DIGI-SEL NOTCH
RIT/TX
CW PITCH
TWIN-PBT
KEY
SPEED
DELAY
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
AGC VR
NR
FILTER
PBT-CLR
DIGI-SEL
APF/TPF
NOTCH
RIT
CLEAR
SPEECH
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
MP-W MP-R
MW V/M
A/B A=B
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
TX
NB
SPLIT
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
AGC SQL NR NB
[RF PWR]
: Max. clockwise
[MIC]
: 10–12 o’clock
[SQL]
: Max. counter-
clockwise
[AGC]: 12 o’clock
[DEGI-SEL]
: 12 o’clock
[NOTCH]
: 12 o’clock
[NB]
: Max. counter clockwise
[AF]
: Max. counter-
clockwise
[DRIVE], [COMP], [MONI GAIN],
[VOX GAIN], [ANTI VOX]
: 12 o’clock
[RF]
: Max. clockwise
[DELAY]
: Max. clockwise
[KEY SPEED]
: 10–12 o’clock
[CW PITCH]
: 12 o’clock
[NR]
: Max. counter clockwise
Initial settings
After resetting the transceiver, set controls as shown
in the figure below.
[I/O]
MW F-INP ENT
POWER
VFO selection
VFOisanabbreviationofVariableFrequencyOscil-
lator, and is commonly referred to as a main tuning
function.
Themaindialisoftencalledthe“VFOknob.
D Selecting VFO-A/VFO-B
InVFOmode,push A/B totoggleVFO-Aand
VFO-B.
• VFO-A or VFO-B appearswhenVFO-AorVFO-Bis
selected, respectively
D VFO equalization
InVFOmode,holddown A=B for 1 second to
settheundisplayedVFOfrequencyandmodeto
thoseofthedisplayedVFO.
•ThreebeepssoundwhentheVFOequalizationiscom-
pleted.
3-3
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
Selecting VFO/memory mode
Push V/M toswitchbetweenVFOandmemory
modes.
• VFO-A or VFO-B appearswheninVFOmode,orthe
selected memory channel number appears when in
memory mode.
•Holdingdown V/M for 1 second transfers the con-
tentsoftheselectedmemorychanneltoVFO.(p.8-4)
V/M
“VFO” indicator
Memory channel
number
A/B
A=B
3-4
Selecting an operating band
The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories
for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-
mation.
This function is convenient when you operate 3
modesononeband.Forexample,oneregisteris
used for a CW frequency, another for an SSB fre-
quency and the other one for an RTTY frequency.
If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and op-
erating mode last used are called up. When the key is
pushed again, another stored frequency and operat-
ing mode are called up.
See the table below for a list of the bands available
and the default settings for each band.
3BASIC OPERATIONS
BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3
1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW
3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB
7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW
10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW
14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW
18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB
21 MHz 21.200000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW
24 MHz 24.950000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 24.900000 MHz CW
28 MHz 28.500000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 28.100000 MHz CW
50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM
General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB
D Using the band stacking registers
q Push 14 5, then select a frequency and an op-
erating mode.
•Thepreviouslyselectedfrequencyandanoperating
mode are memorized in first band stacking register of
that band.
w Push 14 5 again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
•Thefrequencyandoperatingmodethatisselectedin
step q are memorized in 14 MHz first band stacking
register.
e Push 14 5 again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
•Thefrequencyandoperatingmodethatisselectedin
step w are memorized in 14 MHz second band stack-
ing register.
r Push 14 5 again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
•Thefrequencyandoperatingmodethatisselectedin
step e are memorized in 14 MHz third band stacking
register.
•When 14 5 is pushed again, the first band stacking
register set in step w, is over written.
[Example]: 14 MHz band
1
1.8
2
3.5
3
7
4
10
5
14
6
18
7
21
8
24
9
28
GENE
0
50
ENT
F-INP
Band keys
3-5
Frequency setting
The transceiver has several tuning methods for con-
venient frequency tuning.
D Tuning with the main dial
q Push the desired band key on the keypad 13
times.
•Threedifferentfrequenciescanbeselectedoneach
band with the band key.
w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency.
If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indica-
tor lights, and the main dial does not function. In
this case, push [LOCK] to deactivate the lock func-
tion. (See page 5-18 for details.)
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
[EXAMPLE]
7.00000 MHz
21.24000 MHz
21.24000 MHz 21.36000 MHz
Push
Push
Push
1
1.8
1
1.8
2
3.5
2
3.5
2
3.5
3
7
3
7
4
10
4
10
6
18
6
18
7
21
7
21
8
24
9
28
0
50
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
GENE
GENE
GENE
850 kHz (0.85000 MHz)
Push
ENT
F-INP
ENT
F-INP GENE
5
14
8
24
0
50
5
14
Keypad
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad
The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency
entry as described below.
q Push F-INP
ENT .
•
F-INP
indicator appears.
w Input the desired frequency.
•Push GENE to input “. (decimal point)” between the
MHz units and kHz units.
e Push F-INP
ENT to set the input frequency.
•
Tocanceltheinput,pushanyotherkey(except
or
) instead of
F-INP
ENT
.
Band keys
Main dial
3-6
D Quick tuning step
The operating frequency can be changed in larger
steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable)
for quick tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON.
•“Z” appears when the quick tuning function is ON.
w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in
programmed kHz steps.
e Push [TS] again to turn OFF the indicator.
r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired.
3BASIC OPERATIONS
Quick tuning indicator
D 14 tuning step function
When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the
14 tuning function is selectable. Dial rotation is re-
duced to 14 of normal speed when the 14 tuning func-
tion is ON for finer tuning control.
Push [1/4] (MF6) to toggle the 14 tuning function
ON or OFF.
•“ 14” appears when the 14 tuning function is ON.
D Selecting “kHz” step
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON or
OFF.
•“Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.
w Hold down [TS] for 1 second to enter quick tuning
step set mode.
•Selectedtuningstepsforallmodesappear.
e Select the desired operating mode.
r
Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning
step.
t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning
steps for other modes, if desired.
y Push EXIT/SET toexitthesettingdisplay.
NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode,
the quick tuning function must be activated first.
Main dialSelect mode TS
1/4
14 tuning step OFF 14 tuning step ON
1
/
4
ON
1
/
4
OFF
3-7
D Selecting 1 Hz step
A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine
tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF.
w Hold down [TS] for 1 second to turn the 1 Hz tun-
ing step ON or OFF.
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
EXIT/SET
F-5
OTHERS
F-7
SET
F-1
F-2
D Auto tuning step function
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed
accelerates automatically as selected.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
•Holdingdown EXIT/SET for 1 second also selects set
mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] F-5 to enter Others set mode.
r Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select “MAIN DIAL
Auto TS.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition
from HIGH, LOW and OFF.
•HIGH:Approximately 5timesfasterwhenthe
tuning step is set to 1 kHz or smaller
steps;approximately2timesfasterwhen
the tuning step is set to 5 kHz or larger
steps.
•LOW:Approximately2timesfaster
•OFF :AutotuningstepisturnedOFF.
y Push EXIT/SET toexitthesetmode.
1Hz step indicator
3-8
Operating mode selection
SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data),
CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse
(RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data,
FM and FM data modes are selectable in the IC-7700.
Select the desired operation mode as follows.
To select a mode of operation, push the desired mode
switch momentarily. Push the switch again to toggle
between USB and LSB, CW and CW-R, RTTY/RTTY-
R and PSK/PSK-R, AM and FM, if desired. Hold down
the switch for 1 second to toggle between RTTY and
RTTY-R, PSK and PSK-R, if desired.
See the diagram below left for the order of selection.
Microphone signals are muted when data mode is
selected.
• Selecting SSB mode
Push SSB to select USB or LSB.
•USBisselectedfirstwhenabove10MHz;orLSBis
selected first when below 10 MHz operation.
( USB is selected when 5 MHz band is selected for the
USA version.)
AfterUSBorLSBisselected,push SSB to toggle
between USB and LSB.
• Selecting CW mode
Push CW to select CW.
•AfterCWisselected,push CW to toggle between
CW and CW reverse mode.
• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode
Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY or PSK.
•AfterRTTYorPSKisselected,push RTTY/PSK to tog-
gle between RTTY and PSK.
•AfterRTTYorPSKisselected,holddown RTTY/PSK
for 1 second to toggle between RTTY and RTTY re-
verse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectively.
• Selecting AM/FM mode
Push AM/FM to select AM or FM.
•AfterAMorFMisselected,push AM/FM to toggle be-
tween AM and FM.
• Selecting DATA mode
After USB, LSB, AM or FM is selected, push
DATA to select USB data, LSB data, AM data or
FM data mode, respectively.
•Afterdatamodeisselected,push DATA to toggle
between regular voice and data mode.
Afterdatamodeisselected,holddown DATA for 1
second to select data 1, 2 and 3 in sequence.
3BASIC OPERATIONS
RTTY/PSK AM/FM DATA
SSB CW
USB
CW
AM
Hold down mode
switch for 1 second.
Push mode switch
momentarily.
LSB
CW-R
RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R
FM
USB
LSB
AM
FM
USB-D1
LSB-D1
AM-D1
FM-D1
USB-D2
LSB-D2
AM-D2
FM-D2
USB-D3
LSB-D3
AM-D3
FM-D3
3-9
Volume setting
Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the audio output level.
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
RF gain adjustment
Rotate [RF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity.
NOTE:
When [RF] control is adjusted CCW in FM mode,
audio output decreases then disappears. This is
normal, not a malfunction.
Squelch level adjustment
The squelch mutes noise output from the speaker
(closed squelch) when no signal is received.
When no signal is received, rotate [SQL] control
fully counterclockwise first, then rotate [SQL] clock-
wise to the point at which the noise disappears.
•Holddown[XFC]toopenthesquelchtemporarily.
[AF]
Audio output
increases
Audio output
decreases
[RF]
Sensitivity
increases
Sensitivity
decreases
[SQL]
S-meter
squelch
Noise squelch
(Recommended level; FM mode only)
Squelch is
open
[XFC]
D Multi-function digital meter
The IC-7700 can display the multi-function digital
meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all
transmit parameters simultaneously.
q Hold down [METER] for 1 second to turn the multi-
function digital meter ON.
w Push [P-HOLD] F-1 to toggle the peak level hold
function ON.
•“
P-HOLD
appears on the window title when the peak
level hold function is ON.
e Hold down [METER] for 1 second, or push
EXIT/SET to turn the multi-function digital meter
OFF.
Meter indication selection
The S/RF meter indication, during transmit, can be
selected from the following items as you desire.
Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the
desired item.
METER
Po
Indicates the RF output power in watts.
METER
SWR
IndicatestheVSWRonthetransmission
line.
METER
ALC
Indicates the ALC level. The ALC circuit
begins to activate when the RF output
power reaches a preset level.
METER
COMP
Indicates the compression level when
the speech compressor is in use.
METER
I
D
Indicates the drain current of the final
amplifier MOSFETs.
METER
V
D
Indicates the drain terminal voltage of
the final amplifier MOSFETs.
3-10
3BASIC OPERATIONS
“P-HOLD” indicator
METER
METER F-1
P-HOLD
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
Signal strength
level readout
ID readout
Power level
readout
VSWR readout
Compression level
readout ALC level readout VD readout
3-11
D Meter type selection
A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7700—
Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters.
Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to return to normal
screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 , then push [DISP] F-3 to select
display set mode.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select “Meter type
(Normal Screen)” item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter
type from “Standard, “Edgewise” and “Bar.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitdisplaysetmode.
• Edgewise meter
• Bar meter
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
The IC-7700 has a built-in voice synthesizer to an-
nounce the frequency, mode, etc. (S-meter level
can also be announced—p. 12-15) in clear, elec-
tronically-generated voice, in English (or Japanese).
Push SPEECH to announce the currently se-
lected frequency, etc.
•Holddown SPEECH for 1 second to additionally an-
nounce the selected mode.
Pushing a mode switch also announces the ap-
propriate mode. (p. 12-15)
The output level of the voice synthesizer can be
adjusted in level set mode. (p. 12-6)
Voice synthesizer operation
EXIT/SET
F-7
SET
F-3
DISP
F-1
F-2
S
Po
1 3 5 7 9
250W200100 150500
+20 +40 +60dB
S
Po
1 3 5 7 9
250W200100 15050
0
10
+20 +40 +60dB
SPEECH
3-12
Basic transmit operation
3BASIC OPERATIONS
D Microphone gain adjustment
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause in-
terference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
w Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
•Talkintothemicrophoneatyournormalvoicelevel.
e While talking into the microphone, rotate [MIC] so
that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go outside the
ALC zone. (see at left)
r Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.
[MIC] METER
S
ID
0
510
15
0
010
44
ALC 52V VD
20
dB
11.5 23
10 50 100 150 200 250
PO
SWR
COMP
A
W
1
59+20 +40 +60dB
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
ALC zone
ALC zone
[TX] indicator
[RF PWR]
TRANSMIT
Increases
max. 200 W
(50 W for AM)
Decreases
min. 5 W
D Transmitting
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause in-
terference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
•The[TX]indicatorlightsred.
w Push TRANSMIT again or release [PTT] (micro-
phone) to return to receive.
Adjusting the transmit output power
Rotate [RF PWR].
•Adjustablerange :5Wto200W
(AM mode: 5 W to 50 W)
Before transmitting, monitor your selected
operating frequency to make sure transmitting
won’t cause interference to other stations on
the same frequency. It’s good amateur practice
to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard,
ask “is the frequency in use” once or twice,
before you begin operating on that frequency.
3-13
D Drive gain adjustment
The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB
modewithspeechcompressorOFF.The[DRIVE]
control adjusts the gain of the driver stage.
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating
frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause in-
terference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
w Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON,
AM or FM), key down (CW) or push TRANSMIT
(RTTY or PSK) to transmit.
e While talking into the microphone, keying down or
transmitting,rotate[DRIVE]sothattheALCmeter
reading is between 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.
(see left)
•Talkintothemicrophoneatyournormalvoicelevel.
r Release [PTT], stop keying or push TRANSMIT
again to return to receive.
3
BASIC OPERATIONS
S
ID
0
510
15
0
010
44
ALC 52V VD
20
dB
11.5 23
10 50 100 150 200 250
PO
SWR
COMP
A
W
1
59+20 +40 +60dB
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
Drive gain range
Drive gain range
[DRIVE]
METER
Band edge warning beep
This function allows you to hear a beep tone when you tune
in or out of an amateur band’s frequency range. A regular
beep sounds when you tune into a range, and an lower
tone error beep will sound when you tune out of a range.
Also, the TX indicator shows if the selected frequency
is in or out of an amateur band, when an option other
than “OFF” is set.
•ATXindicatorwithdotedrectangle,“
TX
is displayed, in-
stead of the regular
TX
TX indicator, when a frequency
outside of an amateur band frequency range is selected.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET]
F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
•Holdingdown EXIT/SET for 1 second also selects set
mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] F-5 to enter Others set mode.
r Push [Y]
F-1 or [Z]
F-2 to select “Beep (Band
Edge).
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired band
edge warning beep setting. (see at left)
y Push EXIT/SET toexitthesetmode.
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 12-6).
F-1
Y
F-2
Z
F-7
SET
F-5
OTHERS EXIT/SET
When the transverter function is in use, the band
edge warning beep sounds with the default setting.
OFF : Band edge beep is OFF.
ON (Default) : When you tune into or out of the de-
fault amateur band’s frequency range,
a beep sounds. (default)
ON (User) : When you tune outside of, or back into
a user programmed amateur band’s
frequency range, a beep sounds.
ON (User) & TX Limit :
When you tune outside of, or back into
a user programmed amateur band’
s frequency range, a beep sounds.
Transmission is also inhibited outside
the programmed range.
• Band edge warning beep settings
3-14
3BASIC OPERATIONS
D Programming the user band edge
q Select the Others set mode and select the “Beep
(Band Edge)” option.
w Rotate the main dial to select either the “ON (User)”
or “ON (User) & TX Limit” setting.
•[BAND]appearsabove F-5 .
e Push [BAND] F-5 to open the band edge screen.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
band edge.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select the upper and lower band
edge frequency entry cell.
•Push[INS](MF6)toinsertanewblankbandedgeline.
•Holddown[DEL](MF7)for1secondtodeletethese-
lected band edge line.
t Push F-INP ENT , and then input the desired fre-
quency with the keypad.
•Push GENE to input decimal point (“.”) between the
MHz and kHz digits.
•Programeachchannelfromlefttorightandeachfre-
quency must be higher than the preceding frequency.
•Thefrequencythatisduplicated,oroutofanamateur
band, cannot be programmed.
•If you want to return the band edge frequencies to
their default (initial) value, hold down [DEF] F-4 for
1 second.
The band edge initialize screen appears as shown
below, then hold down [OK] F-6 for 1 second to initial-
ize all band edge frequency settings.
y Push F-INP ENT to set the input frequency.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitthesetmode.
Appears when “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is
selected.
• Band edge screen
4-1
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 4
Operating SSB .................................................................................. 4-2
D Convenient functions for receive ...................................................4-2
D Convenient functions for transmit ..................................................4-3
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) .........................4-3
Operating CW ................................................................................... 4-4
D Convenient functions for receive ...................................................4-4
D Convenient functions for transmit ..................................................4-5
D About CW reverse mode ...............................................................4-5
D About CW pitch control .................................................................4-5
D CW side tone function ...................................................................4-5
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation .................................................4-6
Electronic keyer functions ................................................................. 4-7
D Memory keyer screen ....................................................................4-8
D Editing a memory keyer .................................................................4-9
D Contest number set mode ...........................................................4-10
D Keyer set mode ...........................................................................4-11
Operating RTTY (FSK) ................................................................... 4-13
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-14
D About RTTY reverse mode ..........................................................4-14
D Twin peak filter .............................................................................4-14
D Functions for the RTTY decoder display .....................................4-15
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............................................4-15
D RTTY memory transmission ........................................................4-16
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ....................................4-16
D Editing RTTY memory .................................................................4-17
D RTTY decode set mode ..............................................................4-18
D Data saving ..................................................................................4-20
Operating PSK ................................................................................ 4-21
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-22
D About BPSK and QPSK modes ..................................................4-22
D Functions for the PSK decoder display .......................................4-23
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............................................4-23
D PSK memory transmission ..........................................................4-24
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ....................................4-24
D Editing PSK memory ...................................................................4-25
D PSK decode set mode ................................................................4-26
D Data saving ..................................................................................4-28
Operating AM ................................................................................. 4-29
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-29
D Convenient functions for transmit ................................................4-30
Operating FM .................................................................................. 4-31
D Convenient functions for receive .................................................4-31
D Convenient functions for transmit ................................................4-31
Repeater operation ......................................................................... 4-32
D Repeater access tone frequency setting .....................................4-33
Tone squelch operation .................................................................. 4-34
Data mode (AFSK) operation ......................................................... 4-35
4-2
Operating SSB
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push SSB to select LSB or USB.
•“USB”or“LSB”appears.
•Below10MHzLSBisautomaticallyselected;above10
MHz USB is automatically selected.
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.
•TheS-meterindicatesreceivedsignalstrengthwhena
signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
•[TX]indicatorlightsred.
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice
level.
•Adjustthemicrophonegainwith[MIC]atthisstep,if
necessary.
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to
return to receive.
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1” or“P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON, respectively.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)
Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON or
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the
threshold level.
•Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights
when the noise blanker is ON.
•Holddown NB for 1 second to enter noise blank-
er set mode.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-13)
Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
•PBTindicator(above PBT-CLR switch) lights when
PBT is in use.
•Hold down
PBT-CLR
for 1 second to clear the set-
tings.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)
Push [SET] F-7 then [LEVEL] F-1 to enter
level set mode. Select an item with [Y] F-1 /
[Z] F-2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the
audio tone.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)
Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON or
OFF.
•Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
level.
•Noisereductionindicator(above NR switch) lights
when the noise reduction is ON.
• Notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the auto or manual notch
function ON or OFF.
•Rotate[NOTCH]controltosetthe“valley”frequency
for manual notch operation.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
either the auto or manual notch is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-12)
Push [AGC] (MF5) switch several times to select
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
Push AGCVR to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
•Rotate[AGC]controltoadjustthetimeconstant.
• VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 9-3)
Push [VSC] (MF7) to turn theVSC function ON
or OFF.
•TheVSC indicator appears when the voice squelch
function is set to ON.
D Convenient functions for receive
[MIC] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
SSBTRANSMIT
Appears
4-3
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Speech compressor (p. 6-5)
Push [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compres-
sor ON or OFF.
•Holddown[COMP](MF6) for 1 second to select the
compression bandwidth from wide, middle and nar-
row.
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)
Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON or
OFF.
•
VOX
appearswhentheVOXfunctionisON.
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)
Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON
or OFF.
•Rotate[MONIGAIN]toadjustthemonitorgain.
•Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights
when the monitor function is ON.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)
Push [SET] F-7 then [LEVEL] F-1 to enter
level set mode. Select an item with [Y] F-1 /
[Z] F-2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the
audio tone.
D Convenient functions for transmit
D About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)
Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed on
5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the follow-
ing:
•TheUSB,USB data, CW and PSK modes
•Maximumof100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)
•2.8kHzbandwidth(maximum)
It is your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-
mission in this frequency band meets the stringent
conditions under which amateur operations may use
these frequencies.
NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-
quencies, modes and filter settings into memory
channels, for easy recall.
To assist you in operating within the rules specified
by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequen-
cies other than the five shown in the tables below.
• For the USB and USB data modes
The FCC specifies center frequencies on the 5 MHz
frequency band. However, the transceiver displays
carrier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to
1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center fre-
quency.
Transceiver Displayed
Frequency
FCC Channel
Center Frequency
5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz
5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.35700 MHz 5.35850 MHz
5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz
5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz
• For the CW and PSK modes
The transceiver displays the center frequency. There-
fore, tune the transceiver to the specified FCC channel
frequency when you operate in these modes.
Transceiver Displayed
Frequency
FCC Channel
Center Frequency
5.33200 MHz 5.33200 MHz
5.34800 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.35850 MHz 5.35850 MHz
5.37300 MHz 5.37300 MHz
5.40500 MHz 5.40500 MHz
4-4
Operating CW
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push CW to select CW.
•AfterCWmodeisselected,push CW to toggle be-
tween CW and CW-R modes.
•“CW”or“CW-R”appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.
•Trytomatchthedesiredsignal’stonetothesidetone
frequency.
•TheS-meterindicatesreceivedsignalstrengthwhen
signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
t Push TRANSMIT to transmit.
•[TX]indicatorlightsred.
y Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW
signals.
ThepowermeterindicatestransmittedCWoutput
power.
u Adjust CW speed with [KEY SPEED].
•Adjustablewithin6–48WPM.
i Push TRANSMIT to return to receive.
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1” or“P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)
Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON or
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the
threshold level.
•Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights
when the noise blanker is ON.
•Holddown NB for 1 second to enter noise blank-
er set mode.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)
Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON or
OFF.
•Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
level.
•Noisereductionindicator(above NR switch) lights
when the noise reduction is ON.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-13)
Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
•PBTindicator(above PBT-CLR switch) lights when
PBT is in use.
•Hold down
PBT-CLR
for 1 second to clear the set-
tings.
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
•Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
the manual notch is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-12)
Push [AGC] switch several times to select
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
Push AGCVR to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
•Rotate[AGC]controltoadjustthetimeconstant.
• 14 function (p. 3-6)
Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON or OFF.
• Auto tuning function (p. 5-22)
Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON or OFF.
•Thetransceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-
nal within a ±500 Hz range.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
with interference, the automatic tuning function may
not tune properly, or tune onto an undesired signal.
D Convenient functions for receive
[KEY SPEED] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
CWTRANSMIT
Appears
4-5
D About CW reverse mode
CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side
band to receive CW signals.
Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal
and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference.
During CW mode, push CW to select CW and
CW-R mode.
D About CW pitch control
The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone
can be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to
900 Hz in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the oper-
ating frequency.
Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.
•Adjustablewithin300to900Hzin5Hzsteps.
The filter set screen graphically displays the CW
pitch operations. (see at left)
Hold down FILTER for 1 second to access the
filter set screen.
•TheCWpitchfrequencyisgraphicallychangedin5
Hz steps when the selected IF filter passband width
is below 500Hz (“ BPF appears), or in 25 Hz steps
when the selected IF filter passband width is above
600Hz (“ BPF ” disappears).
•Push EXIT/SET or hold down FILTER for 1 sec-
ond to return to the previous screen.
D CW side tone function
When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in
function is OFF— p. 6-3) you can listen to the CW
side tone without actually transmitting.
Thisallowsyoutomatchyourtransmitfrequencyex-
actly to another station’s by matching the audio tone.
You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn
OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. CW side tone
level can be adjusted in level set mode (p. 12-6).
Matching the frequency of a transmitted and re-
ceived signal is called Zero beat.”
Push
BFO
CW-R mode (USB side)
BFO
Desired signal
CW mode (LSB side)
Interference Desired signalInterference
[CW PITCH]
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Break-in function (p. 6-3)
Push BK-IN several times to select the break-
in OFF, semi break-in and full break-in.
• BKIN or F-BKIN appears when the semi break-
in or full break-in function is ON, respectively.
D Convenient functions for transmit
• Filter set screen
l About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)
See page 4-3 for details.
4-6
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation
The APF changes the audio frequency response by
boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired
CW signal.
The peak frequency can be adjusted with [DIGI-SEL]
controlwhen“APF”isselectedfor“DIGI-SELVROp-
eration” in Others set mode (p. 12-15).
The APF audio level can be adjusted in the Level set
mode (p. 12-6).
The audio filter shape is also selectable from “SOFT”
and “SHARP” in Others set mode (p. 12-16).
q During CW mode, push APF/TPF to turn the
audio peak filter ON or OFF.
•“
APF
appears in the display and [APF/TPF] indicator
above this switch lights green.
w Hold down APF/TPF for 1 second several times
to select the desired audio filter width.
•WIDE,MIDandNARfilters,or,320,160and80Hz
filters are available depending on APF type setting in
Other set mode. (p. 12-16)
eIf“APF”isselectedfor“DIGI-SELVROperation,
rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to suit your preference.
[DIGI-SEL]
APF/TPF
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-7
Electronic keyer functions
The IC-7700 has a number of convenient functions for
the built-in electronic keyer.
q During CW mode, push EXIT/SET several times to
normal screen, if necessary.
w Push [KEYER] F-3 to select memory keyer
screen.
e Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu
screen.
r Push one of the LCD function switches ( F-1 to
F-4 ) to select the desired menu. See the diagram
below.
•Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous display.
• Memory keyer screen (p. 4-8)
• Memory keyer menu screen
• Memory keyer edit screen (p. 4-9)
• Contest number set mode (p. 4-10)
Keyer set mode screen (p. 4-11)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
F-1
F-1 F-2
F-3
F-4
F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
EXIT/SET
EXIT/SET
CW
F-1 F-4
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-8
D Memory keyer screen
Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send
menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using
the edit menu.
• Transmitting
EXIT/SET
CWTRANSMIT
F-1
M1
F-4
M4
F-5
–1
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] F-3
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push TRANSMIT to set the transceiver to transmit,
or set the break-in function ON (p. 6-3).
e Push one of the function keys ([M1] F-1 to [M4]
F-4 ) to send the contents of the memory keyer.
•Holdingdownafunctionkeyfor1secondrepeatedly
sends the contents; push any function key to cancel
the transmission.
•Thecontestserialnumbercounterisincrementedeach
time the contents are sent.
•Push[–1] F-5 to reduce the contest serial number
count by 1 before sending the contents of the memory
keyer to a station a second time.
For your information
WhenanexternalkeypadorUSBkeyboardis
connected, the programmed contents, M1—M4,
can be transmitted without selecting the memory
keyer screen.
See pages 2-6, 2-7, 12-16 and 12-17 for details.
r Push EXIT/SET twice to return to normal screen.
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Memory keyer screen
CH Contents
M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST
M2 UR 5NN BK
M3 CFM TU
M4 QRZ?
• Pre-programmed contents
4-9
D Editing a memory keyer
The contents of the memory keyer memories can be
set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory
keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes
for often-used CW sentences, contest serial num-
bers, etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70
characters per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] F-3
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then
push [EDIT] F-2 to select keyer edit screen.
•MemorykeyercontentsofChannel1(M1)isselected.
e Push [M1..M4] F-7 several times to select the de-
sired memory keyer channel to be edited.
r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input.
•[Symbol]appearswhen[123](MF7) is pushed when
“123” character group is selected.
•Selectablecharacters(usingthemaindial);
NOTE:
^ is used to transmit a string of characters with
no inter-character space. Put ^”beforeatext
string such as ^AR, and the string a r is sent
with no space.
is used to insert the CW contest serial
number. The serial number automatically incre-
ments by 1. This function is only available for
one memory keyer channel at a time. Memory
keyer channel M2 used “ by default.
For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.
t Push [t] F-1 or [u] F-2 to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
Pushing[DEL] F-3 deletes a character and
[SPACE] F-4 inserts a space.
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters.
u Push EXIT/SET twice to return normal screen.
/
F-1
F-2
F-7
M1..M4
F-3
DEL
F-4
SPACE
123 Symbol ABC
EXIT/SET
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Memory keyer edit screen
Key selection Editable characters
A to Z (capital letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
/ ? ^ . , @
• Example—  entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST
into memory keyer channel 3
ABC
123
Symbol
4-10
D Contest number set mode
This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number
and count-up trigger, etc.
• Setting contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] F-3
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then
push [001] F-3 to select contest serial number
set mode.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault condition or value.
• Contest number set mode screen t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen.
Main dial
F-1
F-2
EXIT/SET
F-4
DEF
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Number Style
Normal
This item sets the numbering system used for con-
test (serial) numbers— normal or short morse num-
bers.
Short morse numbers are also referred to as “cut”
numbers.
•Normal :Doesnotuseshortmorsenumbers
(default)
•190ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.
•190ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.
•
90 NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.
•
90 NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.
Count Up Trigger
M2
This selects which of the four memories will contain
thecontestserialnumberexchange.Thecount-up
trigger allows the serial number to automatically
incrementaftereachcompleteserialnumberex-
change is sent.
•M1,M2,M3andM4canbeset.(default:M2)
Present Number
001
This item shows the current number for the count-up
trigger channel set above.
•Rotatethemaindialtochangethenumber,orhold
down [001CLR] F-4 for 1 second to reset the cur-
rent number to 001.
4-11
D Keyer set mode
This set mode is used to set the memory keyer
repeat time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer
type, etc.
• Setting contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] F-3
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push EXIT/SET to select memory keyer menu, then
push [CW KEY] F-4 to select keyer set mode.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault condition or value.
t Push EXIT/SET twice to normal screen.
• Keyer set mode screen
Main dial
F-1
F-2
EXIT/SET
F-4
DEF
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
to be continued…
Keyer Repeat Time
2s
When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item
sets the time between transmission.
•1to60secondsin1secondstepscanbeselected.
(default: 2 seconds)
Dot/Dash Ratio
1:1:3.0
This item sets the dot/dash ratio.
Keying weight example:Morse code “K”
DASH
Weight setting:
1:1:3 (default)
Weight setting:
Adjusted
DASH
DOT (fixed*)
Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be
adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.
•1:1:2.8to1:1:4.5(in0.1steps)canbeselected.
(default: 1:1:3.0)
Rise Time
4ms
This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW
envelope.
Key action
Tx output power
• About rise time
Rise time
Tx
Rx
Set Tx power level
Time
0
•2,4,6or8millisecondscanbeselected.
(default: 4 milliseconds)
Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated
if the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.
4-12
D Keyer set mode (continued)
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Paddle Polarity
Normal
This item sets the paddle dot-dash polarity. •Normalandreversepolaritycanbeselected.
Keyer Type
ELEC-KEY
This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY]
connector on the front panel.
•ELEC-KEY,BUG-KEYandStraightkeycanbese-
lected. (default: ELEC-KEY)
Mic Up/Down Keyer
OFF
This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/[DN]
keys to be used as a paddle.
• ON : [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.
• OFF : [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for CW.
NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and
memory channel cannot be changed using
the [UP]/[DN] switches.
4-13
■ Operating RTTY (FSK)
A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/
decoder is built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting
a PC keyboard (p. 2-6), RTTY operation can be per-
formedwithoutanexternalRTTYterminal,TNCor
PC.
If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC,
consult the manual that comes with the RTTY termi-
nal or TNC.
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY.
•AfterRTTYmodeisselected,holddown RTTY/PSK for
1 second to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.
•“RTTY”or“RTTY-R”appears.
e Push [DECODE] F-3 to display the decode
screen.
•TheIC-7700hasabuilt-inBaudotdecoder.
r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical
waveform and ensure the peak points align with
the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency
lines in the FFT scope.
•TheS-meterindicatesreceivedsignalstrengthwhen
signal is received.
t Press [F12] on the connected keyboard to transmit.
•[TX]indicatorlightsred.
y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that
you want to transmit.
•ThetypewrittencontentsareindicatedintheTXbuffer
screen and transmitted immediately.
•Thetextcolorwillchangewhentransmitted.
•Pressoneof[F1]–[F8]totransmittheTXmemorycon-
tents.
u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.
For your convenience
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted.
q Perform the steps q to r above.
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
•ThetypewrittencontentsaredisplayedintheTXbuffer
screen.
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the typewritten contents.
•Thecolorofdisplayedtext,intheTXbufferscreen,will
change when transmitted.
•Tocancelthetransmission,press[F12]twice.
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
FFT scope
TX buffer screen
RX contents screen
Water-fall
Appears
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
RTTY/PSK
F-3
DECODE
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-14
D About RTTY reverse mode
Received characters are occasionally garbled when
the received signal has Mark and Space tones re-
versed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC
connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive re-
versed RTTY signals correctly, select RTTY-R mode.
During RTTY mode, hold down RTTY/PSK for
1 second to select RTTY and RTTY-R mode.
D Twin peak filter
The twin peak filter changes audio frequency response
by boosting the mark and space frequencies (2125
and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY signals.
During RTTY mode, push APF/TPF to turn the
twin peak filter ON or OFF.
•
TPF
” appears in the LCD and the [APF/TPF] indicator
above this switch lights green while the filter is in use.
NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the
received audio output may increase. This is a nor-
mal, not a malfunction.
APF/TPF
Normal Reverse
Space Mark BFO Space Mark
BFO
170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1” or“P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)
Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON or
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the
threshold level.
•Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights
when the noise blanker is ON.
•Holddown NB for 1 second to enter noise blank-
er set mode.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-13)
Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
•PBTindicator(above PBT-CLR switch) lights when
PBT is in use.
•Hold down
PBT-CLR
for 1 second to clear the set-
tings.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)
Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON or
OFF.
•Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
level.
•Noisereductionindicator(above NR switch) lights
when the noise reduction is ON.
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
•Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
the manual notch is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-12)
Push [AGC] switch several times to select
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
Push AGCVR to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
•Rotate[AGC]controltoadjustthetimeconstant.
• 14 function (p. 3-6)
Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON or OFF.
D Convenient functions for receive
4-15
D Functions for the RTTY decoder display
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push RTTY/PSK to select RTTY.
•AfterRTTYmodeisselected,holddown RTTY/PSK for
1 second to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes.
•“RTTY”or“RTTY-R”appears.
e Push [DECODE] F-3 to display the decode
screen.
•WhentunedintoanRTTYsignal,decodedcharacters
are displayed in the RX contents screen.
r Push [HOLD/CLR] F-2 to freeze the current
screen.
•“ HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.
•Push[HOLD/CLR] F-2 again to release the function.
t Hold down [HOLD/CLR] F-2 for 1 second to clear
the displayed characters.
•HOLD indicator disappears at the same time when
the displayed characters are cleared. (The hold func-
tion is cancelled.)
y Push [WIDE] F-7 to toggle the RTTY decode
screen size between normal and wide.
•S/RFmetertypeduringwidescreendisplaycanbese-
lected in display set mode. (pp. 3-11, 12-10)
u Push EXIT/SET to close the RTTY decode screen.
• Wide screen display
D Setting the decoder threshold level
Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some
characters are displayed when no signal is received.
q Select the RTTY decode screen as described
above.
w Push [ADJ] F-5 to select the threshold level set-
ting condition.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder
threshold level.
•Holddown[DEF] F-6 for 1 second to select the de-
fault setting.
r Push [ADJ] F-5 toexitfromthethresholdlevel
setting condition.
The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new
line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.
(p. 4-18)
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET
F-7
WIDE
F-2
HOLD/CLR
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-16
D RTTY memory transmission
Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY memo-
ry. Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu.
q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select RTTY memory
screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] F-7 to select memory bank then
push one of the function keys ([RT1] F-1 to
[RT4] F-4 or [RT5] F-1 to [RT8] F-4 ).
•Whennokeyboardisconnected,theselectedmemory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
•Whenakeyboardisconnected,thememorycontents
will be transmitted immediately when function key is
pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected
keyboard is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below).
•Thetransmissiondate,time,receptiondateand/ortimemay
be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting.
For your information
Whenanexternalkeypadisconnected,thepro-
grammed contents, RT1–RT4, can be transmitted.
See pages 2-7 and 12-16 for details.
D Automatic transmission/reception setting
q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select RTTY memory
screen, then push [EDIT] F-6 to select RTTY
memory edit screen.
•RTTYmemorycontentsoftheChannel1(RT1)isse-
lected.
e Push [RT1..RT8] F-7 several times to select the
desired RTTY memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] F-6 several times to select the
desired operating option as follow.
•AUTOTX/RX :Automatically transmits the se-
lected memory and returns to re-
ceive after the transmission.
•AUTOTX :Automaticallytransmits the se-
le ct ed me m or y. To r et u r n to
receive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
•AUTORX :Press[F12]onthekeyboardto
transmit the selected memory. Au-
tomatically returns to receive after
the transmission.
•Noindication :
Press [F12] on the keyboard to trans-
mit the selected memory and press
[F12] again to return to receive.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitRTTYmemoryeditcondi-
tion.
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
nected.
EXIT/SET
F-7
RT1..RT8
F-6
AUTO TX
or F-7
1–4/5–8
F-1
RT1
F-4
RT4
F-1
RT5
F-4
RT8EXIT/SET
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-17
D Editing RTTY memory
The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and
re-transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY
information. Total capacity of the memory is 70 char-
acters per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select RTTY memory
screen, then push [EDIT] F-6 to select RTTY
memory edit screen.
RTTYmemorycontentsofChannel1(RT1)isse-
lected.
e Push [RT1..RT8] F-7 several times to select the
desired RTTY memory channel to be edited.
r Push [t u] F-5 to select between memory con-
tents and memory name.
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then
rotate the main dial to select the character, or push
the keypad for number input.
•[abc](MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when
“ABC” character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7)
appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when “123” char-
acter group is selected.
•Selectablecharacters(withthemaindial);
For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.
y Push [t] F-1 or [u] F-2 to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
Pushing[DEL] F-3 deletes a character and
[SPACE] F-4 inserts a space.
u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired char-
acters.
i Push EXIT/SET tosetthecontentsandexitRTTY
memory edit screen.
RT1..RT8
EXIT/SET
F-7
//
F-3
DEL
F-4
SPACE
123 Symbol ABC abc
F-1
F-2
F-5
Ω ≈
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• RTTY memory edit screen
• Pre-programmed contents
CH Name Contents
RT1 MYCALLx2 DE ICOM ICOM K
RT2 MYCALLx3 DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K
RT3 QSLUR599 QSL UR 599–599 BK
RT4 DE+UR599 QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599
BK
RT5 73 GL SK 73 GL SK
RT6 CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM
K
RT7 RIG&ANT MYTRANSCEIVERISIC–7700
& ANTENNA IS A 3–ELEMENT
TRIBAND YAGI.
RT8 EQUIP. MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS
INTERNAL FSK UNIT &
DEMODULATOR OF THE
IC–7700.
Key selection Editable characters
A to Z (capital letters)
a to z (small letters)
(selectable for memory name only)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ` ^ + / . , : ; =
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @
( For the memory contents set-
ting, ! $ & ? “ ‘ / . , : ; ( ) are
selectable.)
abc
123
Symbol
ABC
4-18
D RTTY decode set mode
This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc.
• Setting contents
q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] F-1 to select the second RTTY
decode menu, then push [SET] F-6 to select
RTTY decode set mode.
•Push[WIDE] F-7 to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
condition or value.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select the set contents for some
items.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitfromsetmode.
F-3 F-7
WIDE
Ω ≈
Main dial
EXIT/SET
DEF
F-1
F-2
F-4
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• RTTY decode set mode screen
RTTY FFT Scope Averaging
OFF
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)
Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use
of the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color
51 153 255
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•
Push [
t
u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
RTTY Decode USOS
ON
Turn the capability of letter code decoding after re-
ceiving a “space” (USOS; UnShift On Space func-
tion) ON or OFF.
•ON :Decodeaslettercode.
•OFF :Decodeascharactercode.
RTTY Decode New Line Code
CR,LF,CR+LF
Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY de-
coder.
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed
•CR,LF,CR+LF:Makesnewlinewithanycodes.
•CR+LF :MakesnewlinewithCR+LFcode
only.
RTTY Diddle
BLANK
Selects the diddle condition. •BLANK :Transmitsblankcodeduringnocode
transmission.
•LTRS :Transmitslettercodeduringnocode
transmission.
•OFF :TurnsthediddlefunctionOFF.
4-19
D RTTY decode set mode (continued)
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
RTTY TX USOS
ON
ExplicitlyinsertstheFIGScharactereventhoughit
is not required by the receiving station.
•ON :InsertsFIGS.
•OFF :DoesnotinsertFIGS.
RTTY Time Stamp
ON
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception
time) indication ON or OFF.
•ON :Displaysthetimestamp.
•OFF :Notimestampindication.
RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX
ON
Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-
mission capability.
•ON :TransmitsCR+LFcodeonce.
•OFF :TransmitsnoCR+LFcode.
RTTY Time Stamp (Time)
Local
Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage.
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is
selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.
•Local:Selectsthetimethatissetin“Time(Now).
•UTC*:Selectsthetimethatissetin“CLOCK2.
* The name of choice may differ according to
“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 11-2). “UTC” is the
default name of CLOCK2.
RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency)
OFF
Selects the operating frequency display for time
stamp usage.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when
“OFF” is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as
above.
•ON :Displaystheoperatingfrequency.
•OFF :Nooperatingfrequencydisplay.
RTTY Font Color (Receive)
128 255 128
Setthetextcolorforreceivedcharacters.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•ON :Displaystheoperatingfrequency.
•OFF :Nooperatingfrequencydisplay.
RTTY Font Color (Transmit)
255 106 106
Setthetextcolorforreceivedcharacters.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•
Push [t u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp)
0155 189
Setthetextcolorfortransmittedcharacters.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•
Push [
t
u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer)
255 255 255
SetthetextcolorintheTXbufferscreen.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•
Push [
t
u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
4-20
D Data saving
The contents of the RTTY memory and received sig-
nal can be saved into the USB flash drive.
q During RTTY decode screen display, push
[<MENU1>] F-1 to select the RTTY decode sec-
ond menu.
w
Push[SAVE]
F-5
to select decode file save screen.
e Change the following conditions, if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] F-4 to select file name edit
condition.
•Push[DIR/FILE] F-1 several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] or [Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the
main dial to select the character.
•[ABC](MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^
– ( ) { } _ ~ @ can be selected.
•
Push [t]
F-1
to move the cursor left, push [
u
]
F-2
to move the cursor right, [DEL]
F-3
delete a char-
acter and push [SPACE]
F-4
to insert a space.
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.
• File format
z Push [OPTION] F-5 to enter save option
screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
matfromTextorHTML.
•“Text”isthedefaultsetting.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the
default setting.
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous
screen.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB flash drive.
•Push[t
u
] F-4 to select the upper directory.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select folder in the
same directory.
•Holddown[t
u
] F-4 for 1 second to select a
folder in the directory.
•Push[REN/DEL] F-5 to rename the folder.
•Holddown[REN/DEL] F-5 for 1 second to de-
lete the folder.
•Holddown[MAKE] F-6 for 1 second to making
a new folder. (Edit the name in the same manner
asthe“•Filename”above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 twice to select the file
name.
rPush[SAVE] F-6 .
Aftersavingiscompleted,returnstoRTTYdecode
second menu automatically.
Main dial
DIR/FILE EXIT/SET
F-1
F-7
WIDE
F-5
OPTION
F-6
SAVE
F-4
EDIT
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Decode file save screen
• Decode file save screen— file name edit
• Save option screen
For your convenience!
Two data formats,Text and HTML, are available for
PC data storage.
The USB flash drive is not supplied by Icom.
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB]
connector on the front panel, the file name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
• Vector tuning indicator display example
Tuned BPSK signal
BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal
Tuned QPSK signal
4-21
Operating PSK
A high-quality DSP-based PSK31 encoder/decoder
is built-in to the IC-7700. When connecting a PC key-
board (p. 2-6), PSK31 operation can be performed
without PSK software installed on your PC.
If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-
sult the manual that comes with the software.
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push RTTY/PSK to select PSK.
•AfterPSKmodeisselected,holddown RTTY/PSK for 1
second to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.
•“PSK”or“PSK-R”appears.
e
Push [DECODE]
F-3
to display the decode
screen.
•TheIC-7700hasabuilt-inPSK31decoder.
r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial.
•Thesignalisproperlytunedwhentheradiatedlinesin
thevectortuningindicatornarrow,asshowintheex-
ample below.
•Theradiatedlinesinthevectortuningindicatormaybe
displayed sporadically.
•WhenaPSKsignalisreceived,thewater-falldisplayis
activated.
•
The water-fall display shows the signals within the pass-
band. Received PSK signals appear as vertical lines.
t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.
•[TX]indicatorlightsred.
y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
•ThetypewrittencontentsaredisplayedintheTXbuffer
screen and transmitted immediately.
•Thetextcolorwillchangewhentransmitted.
•Pressoneof[F1]–[F8]totransmittheTXmemorycon-
tents.
u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
For your convenience
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted.
q Perform the steps q to r above.
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
•ThemessageisshownintheTXbufferscreen.
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the message.
•Thecolorofdisplayedtext,intheTXbufferscreen,will
be changed when transmitted.
•Tocancelthetransmission,press[F12]twice.
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
FFT scope
Vector tuning indicator
TX buffer screen
RX contents screen
Water-fall
Appears
[TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
RTTY/PSK
F-3
DECODE
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-22
D About BPSK and QPSK modes
BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK31.
•BPSK(BinaryPhaseShiftKeying)modeisthemost
commonly used mode.
•QPSK(QuadraturePhaseShiftKeying)modehas
error correction capability to provide better decoding
than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However,
more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode,
due to the tight phase margin of QPSK.
q During PSK mode selection, push [DECODE] F-3
to display the PSK decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] F-1 to select PSK decode sec-
ond menu.
e Push [B/QPSK] F-2 to toggle between BPSK and
QPSK mode alternately.
<
MENU1
>
F-1
DECODE
F-3
B/QPSK
F-2
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• PSK decode screen— BPSK mode
• PSK decode screen— QPSK mode
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1”or“P.AMP2”appearswhenthepreamp1or
preamp 2 is ON.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)
Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON or OFF,
and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the thresh-
old level.
•Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights
when the noise blanker is ON.
•Holddown NB for 1 second to enter noise blanker
set mode.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)
Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON or
OFF.
•
Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction level.
•Noisereductionindicator(above NR switch) lights
when the noise reduction is ON.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-13)
Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
•PBTindicator(above PBT-CLR switch) lights when
PBT is in use.
•Hold down
PBT-CLR
for 1 second to clear the set-
tings.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-12)
Push [AGC] switch several times to select
AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
Push AGCVR to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
•Rotate[AGC]controltoadjustthetimeconstant.
• Manual notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function
ON or OFF.
•Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
the manual notch is ON.
• Fine tuning (p. 3-7)
During PSK, make sure that the kHz tuning step
function is OFF (no Z indication), hold down
[TS] for 1 second.
•PSKmaynotbedecoded correctlyusingthe10Hz
step tuning.
• 14 function (p. 3-6)
Push [1/4] to turn the 14 function ON or OFF.
D Convenient functions for receive
l About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)
See page 4-3 for details.
4-23
D Functions for the PSK decoder display
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push RTTY/PSK to select PSK.
•AfterPSKmodeisselected,holddown RTTY/PSK for 1
second to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes.
•“PSK”or“PSK-R”appears.
e Push [DECODE] F-3 to display the decode
screen.
•WhentunedintoaPSKsignal,decodedcharactersare
displayed in the RX contents screen.
r
Push [HOLD/CLR]
F-2
to freeze the current
screen.
•“ HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.
•Push[HOLD/CLR] F-2 again to release the function.
t Hold down [HOLD/CLR] F-2 for 1 second to clear
the displayed characters.
•
HOLD indicator disappears at the same time when
the displayed characters are cleared. (The hold func-
tion is cancelled.)
y Push [AFC/NET] F-3 to turn the AFC function
ON.
•“
AFC
appears.
•IfaPSKsignalisreceivedwithintheAFCtuningrange,
the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the
offset frequency is displayed.
•TheAFCtuningrangeissetto±15Hzasthedefault.
Optional ±8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set
mode. (p. 4-26)
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
u Push [AFC/NET] F-3 again to turn the NET func-
tion ON.
•“
NET
is displayed.
i Hold down [AFC/NET] F-3 for 1 second to add
the offset frequency to the displayed frequency.
o Push [WIDE] F-7 to toggle the PSK decode
screen size between normal and wide.
•S/RFmetertypeduringwidescreendisplaycanbese-
lected in display set mode. (pp. 3-11, 12-10)
!0 Push EXIT/SET to close the PSK decode screen.
D Setting the decoder threshold level
Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-
acters are displayed when no signal is received.
q Call up the PSK decode screen as described
above.
w Push [ADJ] F-5 to select the threshold level set-
ting condition.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder
threshold level.
•Holddown[DEF] F-6 for 1 second to select the de-
fault setting.
r Push [ADJ] F-5 toexitfromthethresholdlevel
setting condition.
• AFC/NET indications
“AFC” and “NET” indicators Offset frequency
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET
F-7
WIDE
F-3
AFC/NET
F-2
HOLD/CLR
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-24
D PSK memory transmission
Previously entered characters can be sent using the
PSK memory. Contents of the memory are set using
the edit menu.
q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] F-3
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select PSK memory
screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] F-7 to select memory bank then
push one of the function keys ([PT1] F-1 to
[PT4] F-4 or [PT5] F-1 to [PT8] F-4 ).
•Whennokeyboardisconnected,theselectedmemory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
•Whenakeyboardisconnected,thememorycontents
will be transmitted immediately when function key is
pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected
keyboard is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below).
•Thetransmissiondate,time,receptiondateand/ortimemay
be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting.
For your information
Whenanexternalkeypadisconnected,thepro-
grammed contents, PT1–PT4, can be transmitted.
See pages 2-7 and 12-17 for details.
D Automatic transmission/reception setting
q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] F-3
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select PSK memory
screen, then push [EDIT] F-6 to select PSK mem-
ory edit screen.
•PSKmemorycontentsofChannel1(PT1)isselected.
e Push [PT1..PT8] F-7 several times to select the
desired PSK memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] F-6 several times to select the
desired operating option, as follows.
•AUTOTX/RX :Automaticallytransmitstheselected
memory contents and returns to re-
ceive after the transmission.
•AUTOTX :Automaticallytransmitstheselected
memory contents. To return to re-
ceive, press [F12] on the keyboard.
•AUTORX :Press[F12]onthekeyboardto
transmit the selected memory
contents. Automatically returns to
receive after the transmission.
•Noindication :Press[F12]onthe keyboard to
transmit the selected memory
contents and press [F12] again to
return to receive.
t Push EXIT/SET toreturntoexitfromPSKmemory
edit condition.
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
nected.
EXIT/SET
F-7
PT1..PT8
F-6
AUTO TX
or F-7
1–4/5–8
F-1
PT1
F-4
PT4
F-1
PT5
F-4
PT8 EXIT/SET
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-25
D Editing PSK memory
The contents of the PSK memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store 8
PSK messages for often-used PSK information. Total
capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory
channel.
• Programming contents
q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] F-4 to select PSK memory
screen, then push [EDIT] F-6 to select PSK
memory edit screen.
•PSKmemorycontentsofChannel1(PT1)isselected.
e Push [PT1..PT8] F-7 several times to select the
desired PSK memory channel to be edited.
r Push [t u] F-5 to select between memory con-
tents and memory name.
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then
rotate the main dial to select the character, or push
the keypad for number input.
•[abc](MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when
“ABC” character group is selected, and [Symbol] (MF7)
appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when “123” char-
acter group is selected.
•Selectablecharacters(withthemaindial);
For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the PSK memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.
y Push [t] F-1 or [u] F-2 to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
Pushing[DEL] F-3 deletes a character and
[SPACE] F-4 inserts a space.
u Repeat steps t and y to input the desired char-
acters.
i Push EXIT/SET tosetthecontentsandexitPSK
memory edit screen.
PT1..PT8
EXIT/SET
F-7
//
F-3
DEL
F-4
SPACE
123 Symbol ABC abc
F-1
F-2
F-5
Ω ≈
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Pre-programmed contents
Key selection Editable characters
A to Z (capital letters)
a to z (small letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ` ^ + / . , : ; =
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @
( is for the memory contents set-
ting only.)
CH Name Contents
PT1 MYCALLx2 DE Icom Icom K
PT2 MYCALLx3 DE Icom Icom Icom K
PT3 QSLUR599 QSL UR 599 599 BK
PT4 DE+UR599 QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599
BK
PT5 73 GL SK 73 GL SK
PT6 CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K
PT7 RIG&ANT My transceiver is IC–7700 &
Antenna is a 3–element triband
yagi.
PT8 EQUIP. My PSK equipment is internal
modulator & demodulator of the IC–
7700.
• PSK memory edit screen
ABC
abc
123
Symbol
4-26
D PSK decode set mode
This set mode is used to set the FFT scope setting,
time stamp setting, etc.
• Setting contents
q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
F-3 to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] F-1 to select PSK decode sec-
ond menu, then push [SET] F-6 to select PSK
decode set mode.
•Push[WIDE] F-7 to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
condition or value.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select the set contents for some
items.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitfromsetmode.
F-3 F-7
WIDE
Ω ≈
Main dial
EXIT/SET
DEF
F-1
F-2
F-4
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
PSK FFT Scope Averaging
OFF
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)
Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using
the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color
51 153 255
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
•
Push [
t
u
]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
PSK AFC Range
±15Hz
Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) func-
tion operating range from ±15 Hz (default) and ±8
Hz.
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
PSK Time Stamp
ON
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception
time) display ON or OFF.
•ON :Displaysthetimestamp.
•OFF :Notimestampdisplay.
PSK Time Stamp (Time)
Local
Selects the clock display for time stamp usage.
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF”
is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as shown
above.
•Local:Selectsthetimethatsetin“Time(Now).
•UTC*:Selectsthetimethatsetin“CLOCK2.
* The name of choice may differ according to
“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 11-2). “UTC” is the
default name of CLOCK2.
4-27
D PSK decode set mode (continued)
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
PSK Time Stamp (Frequency)
OFF
Selects the operating frequency display for time
stamp usage.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when
“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as
shown below left.
•ON :Displaystheoperatingfrequency.
•OFF :Nooperatingfrequencydisplay.
PSK Font Color (Receive)
128 255 128
Setthetextcolorforreceivedcharacters.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
Push [t u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
PSK Font Color (Transmit)
255 106 106
Setthetextcolorfortransmittedcharacters.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
Push[t u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
PSK Font Color (Time Stamp)
0155 189
Setthetextcolorfortimestampindication.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
Push[t u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
PSK Font Color (TX Buffer)
255 255 255
SetthetextcolorintheTXbufferscreen.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•
ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
Push[t u]
F-3
to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0
to 255.
4-28
D Data saving
The contents of the PSK memory and received signal
can be saved into the USB flash drive.
q During PSK decode screen display, push
[<MENU1>] F-1 to select PSK decode second
menu.
wPush[SAVE] F-5 to select decode file save
screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] F-4 to select file name edit con-
dition.
•Push[DIR/FILE] F-1 several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
•[ABC](MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^
– ( ) { } _ ~ @ can be selected.
•
Push [t]
F-1
to move the cursor left, push [u]
F-2
to move the cursor right, [DEL]
F-3
delete a char-
acter and push [SPACE]
F-4
to insert a space.
c Push EXIT/SET to store the file name.
• File format
z Push [OPTION] F-5 to enter save option
screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
matbetweenTextandHTML.
•“Text”isthedefaultsetting.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the
default setting.
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous dis-
play.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB flash drive.
•Push[t u] F-4 to select the upper directory.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select folder in the
same directory.
•Holddown[t u] F-4 for 1 second to select a
folder in the directory.
•Push[REN/DEL] F-5 to rename the folder.
•Holddown[REN/DEL] F-5 for 1 second to de-
lete the folder.
•Holddown[MAKE] F-6 for 1 second to make a
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner
asthe“•Filename”above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 twice to select the file
name.
rPush[SAVE] F-6 .
•Aftersavingiscompleted,returntoPSKdecodesec-
ond menu automatically.
Main dial
DIR/FILE EXIT/SET
F-1
F-7
WIDE
F-5
OPTION
F-6
SAVE
F-4
EDIT
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Decode file save screen
• Decode file save screen— file name edit
• Save option screen
For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for
PC data storage.
The USB flash drive is not supplied by Icom.
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the file name can also be
edited from the keyboard.
4-29
Operating AM
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push AM/FM to select AM.
•“AM”indicatorappears.
•AfterAMmodeisselected,push AM/FM to toggle be-
tween AM and FM modes.
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-
quency.
•TheS-meterindicatesreceivedsignalstrengthwhen
signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
•TheTXindicatorlightsred.
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice
level.
•Adjustthemicrophonegainwith[MIC]atthisstep,if
necessary.
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to
return to receive.
Appears
[MIC] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
AM/FM
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1” or“P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-18)
Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON or
OFF.
•Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
level.
•Noisereductionindicator(above NR switch) lights
when the noise reduction is ON.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)
Push [SET]
F-7
then[LEVEL]
F-1
to enter level
set mode. Select an item with [Y]
F-1
/[Z]
F-2
then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio tone.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-13)
Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
•PBTindicator(above PBT-CLR switch) lights when
PBT is in use.
•Holddown PBT-CLR for 1 second to clear the set-
tings.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-17)
Push NB to turn the noise blanker ON or
OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust the
threshold level.
•Noise blanker indicator (above NB switch) lights
when the noise blanker is ON.
•Holddown NB for 1 second to enter noise blank-
er set mode.
• Notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
•Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
quency.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
either the auto or manual notch is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-12)
Push [AGC] switch several times to select AGC
FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
Push AGCVR to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
•Rotate[AGC]controltoadjustthetimeconstant.
• Auto tuning function (p. 5-22)
Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON or OFF.
•Thetransceiver automatically tunes the desired sig-
nal within ±5 kHz range.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
with interference, the automatic tuning function may
not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal.
D Convenient functions for receive
4-30
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)
Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON or
OFF.
•“ VOX appearswhentheVOXfunctionisON.
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)
Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON
or OFF.
•Rotate[MONIGAIN]toadjustthemonitorgain.
•Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights
when the monitor function is ON.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)
Push [SET] F-7 then [LEVEL] F-1 to enter
level set mode. Select an item with [Y] F-1 /[Z]
F-2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio
tone.
D Convenient functions for transmit
4-31
Operating FM
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push AM/FM to select FM.
•“FM”indicatorappears.
•AfterFMmodeisselected,push AM/FM to toggle be-
tween FM and AM modes.
e Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired fre-
quency.
•TheS-meterindicatesreceivedsignalstrengthwhen
signal is received.
•10kHztuningstepispresetfortheFMmode.
•Push FILTER several times to select the desired filter
width.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
t Push TRANSMIT or [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
•TheTXindicatorlightsred.
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice
level.
•Adjustthemicrophonegainwith[MIC]atthisstep,if
necessary.
FMnarrowtransmissionisavailablewhen“FIL2”or
“FIL3” is selected.
u Push TRANSMIT or release [PTT] (microphone) to
return to receive.
Appears
[MIC] [TX] indicator [RX] indicator
[AF] Main dial
Band keys
AM/FM FILTER
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Preamp (p. 5-10)
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
•Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
•“P.AMP1” or“P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON.
• Auto notch filter (p. 5-19)
Push NOTCH to turn the auto notch function
ON or OFF.
•Notchindicator(above NOTCH switch) lights when
the auto notch is ON.
• Attenuator (p. 5-10)
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenu-
ator in 6 dB steps.
•Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
•“ATT”andattenuationlevelappearwhentheattenu-
ator is ON.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-4)
Push [SET] F-7 then [LEVEL] F-1 to enter
level set mode. Select an item with [Y] F-1 /[Z]
F-2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio
tone.
D Convenient functions for receive
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 6-2)
Push VOX to turn the VOX function ON or
OFF.
• VOX appearswhentheVOXfunctionisON.
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 6-4)
Push MONITOR to turn the monitor function ON
or OFF.
•Rotate[MONIGAIN]toadjustthemonitorgain.
•Monitor indicator (above MONITOR switch) lights
when the monitor function is ON.
• Audio tone control (p. 12-5)
Push [SET] F-7 then [LEVEL] F-1 to enter
level set mode. Select an item with [Y] F-1 /[Z]
F-2 then rotate the main dial to adjust the audio
tone.
D Convenient functions for transmit
4-32
Repeater operation
A repeater retransmits a received signal on a differ-
ent frequency. When using a repeater, the transmit
frequency is shifted from the receive frequency by an
offset frequency. A repeater can be accessed using
split frequency operation with the transmit frequency
shifted to the repeater's receive frequency.
For accessing a repeater which requires an access
tone, set the tone frequency in tone frequency set
mode as described below.
q First, set the frequency offsets for HF and 50 MHz
band, then turn ON the quick split function in Oth-
ers set mode. (p. 12-13)
w Push V/M toselectVFOmode.
e Push the desired band key.
r Push AM/FM several times to select FM mode.
t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-
quency).
y Hold down SPLIT for 1 second to start repeater
operation.
•RepeatertoneisturnedONautomatically.
•[SPLIT]indicatorlightsand
SPLIT
appears on the
LCD.
•Shiftedtransmitfrequencyand“TX”appearinthesub
band.
•Thetransmitfrequencycanbemonitoredwhilepush-
ing [XFC].
u Hold down [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to re-
ceive.
iToreturntosimplex,push SPLIT momentarily.
[SPLIT] indicator
[XFC] Main dial
Band keys V/M
AM/FM SPLIT
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
4-33
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Repeater access tone frequency setting
Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-
cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your
normal signal and must be set in advance. The trans-
ceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.
q Select FM mode.
w Hold down [TONE] (MF6) for 1 second to tone fre-
quency set mode.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select REPEATER
TONE item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater
tone frequency.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault setting.
t Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous display.
• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)
Main dial
F-4
DEF
TONE
F-1
F-2
AM/FM
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
085.4
088.5
091.5
094.8
097.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
4-34
Tone squelch operation
The tone squelch opens only when receiving a sig-
nal containing a matching subaudible tone. You can
silently wait for calls from group members using the
same tone.
q Set the desired frequency band and select FM
mode.
w Push [TONE] (MF6) to turn the tone squelch func-
tion ON.
•“ TSQL ” appears
e Hold down [TONE] (MF6) for 1 second to select the
tone frequency set mode.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select T-SQL TONE
item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone
squelch frequency.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault setting.
y Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous display.
u When the received signal includes a matching
tone, squelch opens and the signal can be heard.
•Whenthereceivedsignalstonedoesnotmatch,tone
squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator shows
signal strength.
•Toopenthesquelchmanually,push[XFC].
i Operate the transceiver in the normal way.
o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF6) to
clear “TSQL.
• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)
Main dial
F-4
DEF
TONE
F-1
F-2
AM/FM
4RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
085.4
088.5
091.5
094.8
097.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
4-35
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Data mode (AFSK) operation
When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC
and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes
with the TNC and/or the software.
q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 2-9)
w Push a band key to select the desired band.
e Push SSB or AM/FM to select the desired op-
erating mode.
r Push DATA to turn data mode ON.
•Oneof“-D1,“-D2”or“-D3”isadditionallyappears.
Duringdatamodeselection,holddown DATA for 1
second to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3)
in sequence.
t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal
and decode it correctly.
•AlsousethetuningindicatoroftheTNCorsoftware.
•DuringSSBdatamode,the14 tuning function can be
used for critical tuning.
y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit.
WhenoperatinginSSBdatamode,adjusttheTNC
output level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go
outside the ALC zone.
NOTE: When data mode 1 (D1) is selected, the
audio input from the [ACC1 (pin 4)] is used for
transmission instead of [MIC]’s. (Modulation input con-
nector can be changed in ACC set mode (pp. 12-7, 12-8).
DATA1: [ACC], DATA2: [MIC] and [ACC], DATA3: [MIC] are
defaut settings. )
ThefixedconditionisusedforSSBdatatransmis-
sion as follows:
•[COMP] :OFF
•Txbandwidth :MID
•TxTone(Bass) :0
•TxTone(Treble) :0
For your information
Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode
is selected.
Seethediagramtotheleftforthetone-pairexample.
200 Hz 2125 Hz
2325 Hz
Carrier frequency
(displayed frequency)
Appears
Main dial
Band keys
[AF] AM/FM DATASSB
• Tone-pair example
5-1
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Section 5
Spectrum scope screen .................................................................... 5-2
D Center mode ................................................................................. 5-2
DFixedmode ................................................................................... 5-3
D Mini scope screen display ............................................................ 5-4
D Scope set mode ........................................................................... 5-4
D USB mouse operation .................................................................. 5-9
Preamplifier .................................................................................... 5-10
Attenuator ....................................................................................... 5-10
RIT function .................................................................................... 5-11
D RIT monitor function ....................................................................5-11
AGC function .................................................................................. 5-12
D Selecting the preset value ...........................................................5-12
D Adjusting the AGC time constant ................................................5-12
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value ...............................5-12
Twin PBT operation ........................................................................ 5-13
IF filter selection ............................................................................. 5-14
D IF filter selection ......................................................................... 5-14
DFilterpassbandwidthsetting(exceptFMmode) ....................... 5-14
D Roofing filter selection ................................................................ 5-15
D DSP filter shape ......................................................................... 5-15
D Filter shape set mode ................................................................. 5-15
Noise blanker .................................................................................. 5-17
D NB set mode ............................................................................... 5-17
Noise reduction ............................................................................... 5-18
Dial lock function ............................................................................ 5-18
Notch function ................................................................................. 5-19
Digital selector ................................................................................ 5-19
Audio Scope screen ....................................................................... 5-20
D Audio scope set mode ................................................................ 5-21
Autotune function ............................................................................ 5-22
5-2
Spectrum scope screen
This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to dis-
play the frequency and relative signal strength of
received signals on the strengths of signals. The
IC-7700 has two modes for the spectrum display—
oneiscentermode,andtheotherisfixedmode.
In addition, the IC-7700 has a mini scope screen to
save screen space.
D Center mode
Displays signals around the set frequency within the
selected span. The set frequency is always displayed
at the center of the screen.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close any multi-
function screens, if necessary.
w Push [SCOPE] F-1 to select the scope screen.
•Push[WIDE] F-7 to toggle the screen size be-
tween normal and wide.
e Push [CENT/FIX] F-5 to select the center mode.
•“
CENTER
is displayed when center mode is selected.
r Push [SPAN] F-1 several times to select the
scope span.
•±2.5,±5.0,±10,±25,±50,±100and±250kHzarese-
lectable.
•Holddown[SPAN] F-1 for 1 second to return to ±2.5
kHz span.
•Sweepspeedisselectableforeachspanindepend-
ently in scope set mode. (pp. 5-5, 5-6)
t Push [ATT] F-2 several times to activate an at-
tenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
•10,20and30dBofattenuationisavailable.
•Holddown[ATT] F-2 for 1 second to turn OFF the at-
tenuator.
y Push [MARKER] F-3 to turn the marker for trans-
mit frequency ON or OFF.
•“
T
displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
•“<<”or“>>”appearswhenthemarkerisoutofrange.
•Thespectrumscopeshowsthetransmitsignalwhile
transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set
mode. (p. 5-5)
•Thespectrumscopeshowsthepeaklevelholdfunc-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the
current spectrum in a different color until the receive
frequency changes. This can be deactivated and the
waveform color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)
u Push [HOLD] F-4 to freeze the current spectrum
display.
•“
HOLD
appears while the function is in use.
•Thepeakholdfunctioncanbedeactivatedinscopeset
mode.
i Push EXIT/SET toexitthescopescreen.
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal
may also appear. Push [ATT] F-2 several times to
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.
Spurious signals may be displayed. They are gen-
erated in the internal scope circuit and do not indi-
cate a transceiver malfunction.
F-2
AT T
F-4
HOLD
F-1
SPAN
F-7
WIDE
F-3
MARKER
F-5
CENT/FIX
EXIT/SET
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
• Scope spurious signal example
Spurious signals may be received on the spectrum
scope screen regardless of the transceiver’s state
(TX or RX). They are generated in the scope circuit.
This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
Scope spurious example
• Spectrum scope
Waterfall
5-3
DFixed mode
Displays signals within the specified frequency range.
Conditions on the selected frequency band can be
observed at a glance when using this mode.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close any multi-
function screens, if necessary.
w Push [SCOPE] F-1 to select the scope screen.
•Push[WIDE] F-7 to toggle the screen size be-
tween normal and wide.
e Push [CENT/FIX] F-5 toselectthefixedmode.
•“
FIX
isdisplayedwhenfixedmodeisselected.
r Push [ATT] F-2 several times to activate an at-
tenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
•10,20and30dBofattenuationisselectable.
•Holddown[ATT] F-2 for 1 second to turn OFF the at-
tenuator.
t Push [MARKER] F-3 several times to select the
marker for transmit frequency or turn the marker
OFF.
•
R
displays the marker at the receive frequency. (al-
ways displayed)
•“
T
displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
•“<<”or“>>”appearswhenthemarkerisoutofrange.
•Thespectrumscopeshowsthetransmitsignalwhile
transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set
mode. (p. 5-5)
•Thespectrumscopeshowsthepeaklevelholdfunc-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the
current spectrum in a different color until the receive
frequency changes. This can be deactivated and the
waveform color can be set in scope set mode. (p. 5-5)
y Push [HOLD] F-4 to freeze the current spectrum
waveform.
•“
HOLD
appears while the function is in use.
•Thepeakholdfunctioncanbedeactivatedinscopeset
mode.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitthescopescreen.
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal
may appear. Push [ATT] F-2 several times to acti-
vate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.
The scope bandwidth can be specified for each fre-
quency band independently in scope set mode. (pp.
5-6 to 5-8)
F-4
HOLD
F-5
CENT/FIX
EXIT/SET
F-2
AT T
F-3
MARKER
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
5-4
D Mini scope screen display
The mini scope screen can be displayed with another
screen display, such as set mode menu, decode
screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.
qSetthescopemode(centerorfixed),marker,at-
tenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pp. 5-2, 5-3)
w Push M.SCOPE to toggle the mini scope display
ON or OFF.
TheS/RFmetertypeduringminiscopedisplaycan
be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide
Screen) item). (p. 12-10)
D Scope set mode
This set mode is used to set the waveform color,
sweepingspeed,scoperangeforfixedmode,etc.
q During spectrum scope display ON, push [SET]
F-6 to select scope set mode screen.
•Push[WIDE] F-7 to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
w Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
e Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault condition or value.
Push[t u] F-3 to select the set contents for some
items.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitfromsetmode.
F-3 F-7
WIDE
Ω ≈
Main dial
EXIT/SET
DEF
F-1
F-2
F-4
M.SCOPE
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
5-5
D Scope set mode (continued)
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Scope during Tx (CENTER Type)
ON
Turn display of the transmit signal ON or OFF. NOTE: Transmit signal display is available for the
center mode only.
Max Hold
ON
Turn the peak level hold function ON or OFF.
CENTER Type Display
Filter Center
Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope
display (center mode only).
•FilterCenter :Showstheselectedfilter’scenter
frequency at the center.
•CarrierPointCenter
: Shows the selected operating
mode carrier point frequency at the
center.
•CarrierPointCenter(Abs.Freq.)
: In addition to the carrier point
center setting above, the actual fre-
quency is displayed at the bottom
of the scope.
Waveform Type
Fill
Select the outline indication of the waveform for the
spectrum scope.
•Fill : The waveform is described by only
the color.
•Fill+Line :Thewaveformisdescribedbythe
color and outline.
Waveform Color (Current)
217 241 247
Set the waveform color for the currently received sig-
nals.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
Thesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidethe
RGB scale.
Waveform Color (Line)
70 30 0
Set the waveform color for the currently received sig-
nals.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•Push[F-3• ] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
•ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
Waveform Color (Max Hold)
58 110 147
Setthewaveformcolorforthereceivedsignalsmax-
imum level.
•ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
Thesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidethe
RGB scale.
5-6
D Scope set mode (continued)
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Waterfall Display
ON
Set the waterfall display to ON or OFF. •ON : Displays the waterfall of the spectrum scope.
•OFF:Doesnotdisplaythewaterfall.
Waterfall Peak Color Level
Grid
8
The signal level that reaches a peak color is set to
Grid 1 to Grid 8 for the waterfall display.
Higher signal levels are Red, Yellow, Green, Light-
blue, Blue and Black in order.
Sweep Speed (± 2.5k)
MID
Select the sweep speed for the ±2.5 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
“FAST” setting.
(± 5k)
MID
Select the sweep speed for the ±5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
“FAST” setting.
(± 10k)
FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±10 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
(± 25k)
FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±25 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
(± 50k)
FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±50 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
(± 100k)
FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±100 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
(± 250k)
FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±250 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
5-7
D Scope set mode (continued)
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Fixed Edges ( 0.03 1.60)
0.750 1.250MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for
bands below 1.6 MHz.
•Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(1.60 2.00)
1.800 2.000MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
(2.00 6.00)
3.500 4.000MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(6.00 8.00)
7.000 7.300MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(8.00 11.00)
10.100 10.150MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(11.00 15.00)
14.000 14.350MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(15.00 20.00)
18.068 18.168MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
5-8
D Scope set mode (continued)
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
(20.00 22.00)
21.000 21.450MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(22.00 26.00)
24.890 24.990MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(26.00 30.00)
28.000 28.500MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(30.00 45.00)
30.000 30.500MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
(45.00 60.00)
50.000 50.500MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected.
•Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display
bandwidthof5kHztoamaximumof500kHz.
5-9
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
D USB mouse operation
If you connect a USB mouse to the transceiver, a
mouse pointer appears on the spectrum scope screen.
Now, you can change the frequency by using the
mouse.
Mouse pointer
While holding down [XFC], the mouse changes the
transmit frequency.
• Mouse operation on the Center mode
Button Operation Description
Left
Click
The frequency changes to
the clicking point and mouse
pointer move to the center of
the screen.
Drag
The frequency changes to
the clicking point and mouse
pointer move to the center
of the screen, and then the
frequency increases or de-
creases.
Right Click/Drag
The Right button temporarily
changes the frequency.
While holding the button, same
action as the Left button, but
release it to return to the origi-
nal frequency.
• Mouse operation on the Fix mode
Button Operation Description
Left
Click The frequency and marker
change to the clicking point.
Drag
The frequency and marker
change to the clicking point,
and then the frequency in-
creases or decreases.
Right Click/Drag
The Right button temporarily
changes the frequency.
While holding the button, same
action as the Left button, but
release it to return to the origi-
nal frequency.
Changing frequencies in the Drag operation differ
depending on the tuning step settings.
5-10
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Preamplifier
The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set
this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak
signals.
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the
preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
Hold down [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 second to turn the
preamp function OFF.
P.AMP
1
For all HF and 50 MHz bands
P.AMP
2
High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band and
above (Available for all HF and 50 MHz
bands)
About the “P.AMP2”
The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When
the “P.AMP 2” is used in the presence of strong elec-
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In
such cases, use the transceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or
“P.AMP OFF” setting.
The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:
•Usedonbandsabove24MHzandwhensignalsare
weak.
•Receivesensitivityisinsufficientwhenusinglow-
gain antennas, or while using a narrow band an-
tenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a
short Yagi antenna).
Attenuator
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being
distorted when very strong signals are near the de-
sired frequency or when very strong electromagnetic
fields, such as from broadcast stations near your lo-
cation.
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenua-
tor 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.
Hold down [ATT] (MF4) for 1 second to turn the at-
tenuator function OFF.
P.AMP
ATT
ATT
6dB
6 dB
attenuation
ATT
12dB
12 dB
attenuation
ATT
18dB
18 dB
attenuation
The preamp (P.AMP1 or P.AMP2) cannot be used
while the digital selector is activated.
Also the preamp is automatically disabled when the
digital selector is turned ON.
5-11
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
RIT function
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received
station.
The function shifts the receive frequency up to
±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the transmit
frequency.
q Push RIT to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.
•
RIT
and the tuned receive frequency appear when
the function is ON.
w Rotate the [RIT/TX] control.
•Holddown CLEAR for 1 second to reset the RIT fre-
quency.
•Push CLEAR momentarily to reset the RIT frequency
when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15)
•Hold down RIT for 1 second to add the shift fre-
quency to the operating frequency.
D RIT monitor function
When the RIT function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-
lows you to monitor the operating frequency directly
(RIT is temporarily cancelled).
For your convenience — Calculate function
The shift frequency of the RIT function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
While displaying the RIT shift frequency, hold down
RIT for 1 second.
[RIT/TX]
RIT CLEAR
XFC
AGC function
The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to
produce a constant audio output level even when the
received signal strength varies greatly.
The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics (time
constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM modes.
TheFMmodeAGCtimeconstantisfixedas‘FAST’
(0.1 seconds) and AGC time constant cannot be
changed.
D Selecting the preset value
q Select any non-FM mode.
w Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC fast,
AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow.
•Hold down AGCVR for 1 second to turn the AGC
function OFF.
D Adjusting the AGC time constant
q Select any non-FM mode.
w Push AGCVR , then rotate [AGC] control to adjust
the AGC time constant.
•[AGCVR]indicatorabovetheswitchlightsgreen.
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value
q Select any non-FM mode.
w Hold down [AGC] (MF5) for 1 second to enter AGC
set mode.
e Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST
time constant.
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC FAST.
•AGCtimeconstantcanbesetbetween0.1to8.0sec-
onds (depends on mode) or turned OFF.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
t Push [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time constant.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC MID.
•AGCtimeconstantcanbesetbetween0.1to8.0sec-
onds (depends on mode) or turned OFF.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
u Push [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant.
i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC SLOW.
•AGCtimeconstantcanbesetbetween0.1to8.0sec-
onds (depends on mode) or turned OFF.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
o Select another non-FM mode. Repeat steps e to
i if desired.
!0 Push EXIT/SET toexittheAGCsetmodescreen.
[AGC] control AGC VR AGC
5-12
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant
0.3 (FAST) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
SSB 2.0 (MID) 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
6.0 (SLOW)
0.1 (FAST) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
CW 0.5 (MID) 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
1.2 (SLOW)
RTTY 0.1 (FAST) 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
PSK 0.5 (MID) 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
1.2 (SLOW)
3.0 (FAST) 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0,
AM 5.0 (MID) 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0
7.0 (SLOW)
FM 0.1(FAST) Fixed
• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.)
5-13
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Twin PBT operation
To reject interference, PBT (Passband Tuning) elec-
tronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting
the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF filter pass-
band. The IC-7700 uses DSP for the PBT function.
Moving both [TWIN-PBT] controls shifts the IF pass-
band center frequency both above and below the re-
ceived frequency.
The LCD graphically shows the passband width
and shift frequency.
•PBTindicatorabove PBT-CLR switch lights when PBT
is in use.
Hold down FILTER for 1 second to enter the filter
set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-
quency is displayed in the filter set screen.
Hold down PBT-CLR for 1 second to set the
[TWIN-PBT] controls to the center positions.
The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/
RTTY/PSK modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode.
In this time, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in
the SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes, and 100 Hz in the
AM mode.
•[TWIN-PBT]shouldnormallybesettothecenterposi-
tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-
ence.
•WhenPBTisused,theaudiotonemaybechanged.
•NotavailableforFMmode.
•While rotating[TWIN-PBT], noisemayoccur.This
comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an
equipment malfunction.
[TWIN-PBT]
PBT-CLR
Shows passband width, shift value and condition
IF center frequency Interference Desired signal
Passband
Both controls in the
center positions
Cutting the lower
passband edge
Cutting both lower and
higher passband edges
Interference InterferenceDesired signal
Passband
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
• Filter set screen
• PBT operation example
BW: Passband width
Passband’s center frequency
IF center frequency
PBT1
PBT2
SFT: Shift value
• About passband width and shift value on the screen
FILTER
5-14
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Mode IF filter Adjustable range (steps)
SSB
FIL1 (3.0 kHz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)
FIL2 (2.4 kHz)
FIL3 (1.8 kHz)
SSB-D
CW
PSK
FIL1 (1.2 kHz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)
FIL2 (500 Hz)
FIL3 (250 Hz)
RTTY
FIL1 (2.4 kHz) 50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 Hz to 2.7 kHz (100 Hz)
FIL2 (500 Hz)
FIL3 (250 Hz)
AM
AM-D
FIL1 (9.0 kHz)
200 Hz to 10 kHz (200 Hz)
FIL2 (6.0 kHz)
FIL3 (3.0 kHz)
FM
FM-D
FIL1 (15 kHz)
Fixed
FIL2 (10 kHz)
FIL3 (7.0 kHz)
The filter selection is automatically memorized in
each mode.
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-
rized in each filter.
•Duringthepassbandwidthsetting
IF filter selection
The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for
each mode.
For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width
can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps.
A total of 41 passband widths are available.
For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set
within 50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of
32 passband widths are available.
For AM mode, the passband width can be set within
200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-
band widths are available.
ForFMmode,thepassbandwidthisfixedand3
passband widths are available.
D IF filter selection
q Select the desired mode.
w Push FILTER several times to select the IF filter
1, 2 or 3.
•Theselectedpassbandwidthandfilternumberisdis-
played in the LCD.
D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode)
q Hold down FILTER for 1 second to enter filter set
screen.
wSelectanymodeexceptFM.
•PassbandwidthsforFMmodesarefixedandcannot
be adjusted.
e Push FILTER several times to select the desired
IF filter.
r Push [BW] F-1 , then rotate the main dial to set
the desired passband width.
Then push [BW] F-1 again.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the default
value.
Whileholdingdown[BW] F-1 , rotating the main dial
also adjusts the desired passband width.
t If desired, repeat steps w to r.
y Push EXIT/SET toexitfiltersetscreen.
The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the
passband width is changed.
This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT
shift frequencies and CW pitch operations.
Blinks
5-15
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
D Roofing filter selection
The IC-7700 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the
1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer-
ence reduction from nearby strong signals.
q Hold down FILTER for 1 second to enter filter set
screen.
wSelectanymodeexceptFM.
e Push [ROOFING] F-6 to select the desired filter
width from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitfiltersetscreen.
D DSP filter shape
The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data
and CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.
q Hold down FILTER for 1 second to enter filter set
screen.
w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode.
e Push [SHAPE] F-7 to select the desired filter
shape from soft and sharp.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitfiltersetscreen.
The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and 50
MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width
setting (CW only) independently from your default set-
ting in filter shape set mode.
D Filter shape set mode
The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and
CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.
q Hold down FILTER for 1 second to enter filter set
screen.
w Hold down [SHAPE] F-7 for 1 second to enter fil-
ter shape set mode.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from
soft and sharp.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitfiltershapesetmode.
• Default roofing filter (unit: kHz)
Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3
SSB 15 15 6
SSB-D 6 6 6
CW 6 6 6
RTTY 15 6 6
PSK 6 6 6
AM 15 15 15
D Filter shape set mode (continued)
5-16
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
HF SSB (600Hz – )
SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
SSB–D (600Hz – )
SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF
bands.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
CW ( – 500Hz)
SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.
CW (600Hz – )
SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands. The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
50M SSB (600Hz – )
SOFT
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
SSB–D (600Hz – )
SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
CW ( – 500Hz)
SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.
CW (600Hz – )
SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
5-17
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Noise blanker
The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such
as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is
not available for FM mode.
q Push NB to turn the noise blanker function ON
or OFF.
•[NB]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
w Rotate [NB] control to adjust the noise blanker
threshold level.
When using the noise blanker, received signals
maybedistortediftheyareexcessivelystrongor
for other types of noise than impulse. Turn the noise
blanker OFF, or rotate [NB] control to a shallow po-
sition in this case.
D NB set mode
To deal with various type of noise, attenuation level
and noise blanking duration can be set in NB set
mode.
q Hold down NB for 1 second to enter NB set
mode.
w Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
item.
e Rotate the main dial to set the desired level or
value.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitNBsetmode.
[NB] control
NB
NB Depth
8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.
NB Width
50
Set the blanking duration from 1 to 100.
5-18
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Noise reduction
The noise reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals which are
buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise
reduction function.
q Push NR to turn the noise reduction ON.
•[NR]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduc-
tion level.
e Push NR to turn the noise reduction OFF.
•[NR]indicatorlightsoff.
Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio
signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control
formaximumreadability.
Dial lock function
The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by
accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-
tion electronically locks the dial.
Push [LOCK] to toggle the dial lock function ON or
OFF.
•The[LOCK]indicatorlightswhenthediallockfunction
is in use.
[LOCK] indicator
XFC
AUTO
TUNE
TS
LOCK
LOCK
[NR] control
NR
5-19
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Notch function
This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions.
The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically
attenuate beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if they
are moving. The manual notch can be set to attenuate
a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.The auto notch
can be used in SSB, AM and FM mode. The manual
notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM
modes.
Push NOTCH to toggle the notch function be-
tween auto, manual and OFF in the SSB and AM
modes.
Push NOTCH to turn the manual notch function
ON or OFF in the CW, RTTY, PSK modes.
Push NOTCH to turn the auto notch function ON
or OFF in the FM mode.
•[NOTCH]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
•Holddown NOTCH for 1 second to select the notch
filter width for manual notch from wide, middle and nar-
row.
•Settoattenuateafrequencyformanualnotchviathe
[NOTCH] control.
•“
AN
appears when auto notch is in use.
•“
MN
appears when manual notch is in use.
While tuning the manual notch, noise may be
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
Digital selector
The digital selector manually adjusts the center fre-
quency of the automatic pre-selector. The available
frequency is between the 1.5 MHz to 29.999999 MHz
range.
The automatic pre-selector adds selectivity ahead of
the1stmixer.Thisreducesintermodulationdistortion
from strong signals near the received frequency.
The automatic pre-selector tracks the frequency tun-
ing, changing its center frequency in discrete steps.
q Push
DIGI-SEL
to turn the digital selector ON or
OFF.
•[DIGI-SEL]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
w Rotate [DIGI-SEL] control to adjust the center fre-
quency.
NOTE:
•
When rotating the main dial while the digital selec-
tor is activated, mechanical noise may be heard
due to the switching noise from internal relays.
•Thepreamp(P.AMP1orP.AMP2)cannotbeused
while the digital selector is activated.
[NOTCH] control
NOTCH
[DIGI-SEL] control
DIGI-SEL
• Manual notch indication
• Auto notch indication
5-20
5FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
• Audio scope
OscilloscopeWaterfall
FFT Scope
Audio scope screen
F-2
ATT
F-4
HOLD
F-6
LEVEL TIME SET
F-5 F-7
EXIT/SET
This audio scope allows you to display the received
signal’s frequency component to the FFT scope, and
its waveform component to the Oscilloscope. The FFT
scope has an waterfall.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close any multi-
function screens, if necessary.
w Push [AUDIO] F-6 to select the scope screen.
e Push [ATT] F-2 several times to activate an at-
tenuator or turn OFF the attenuator for the FFT
scope.
•0(OFF),10,20and30dBattenuatorsareselectable.
•Holdingdown[ATT] F-2 for 1 second to turn the at-
tenuator OFF.
rPush[LEVEL] F-5 to select the level setting for
the Oscilloscope.
•0,–10,–20and–30dBareselectable.
t Push [TIME] F-6 several times to select the time
setting for the Oscilloscope.
•1,3,10,30,100and300ms/Divareselectable.
y Push [HOLD] F-4 to freeze the current audio
waveform.
•“
HOLD
appears while the function is in use.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitthescopescreen.
When the Monitor function is ON, you can see the
TX audio on the Audio scope.
•Rotate[MONIGAIN]toadjustthelevelsettingforthe
TX audio.
5-21
5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
FFT Scope Waveform Type
Fill
Select the waveform type for the FFT scope. •Fill : The waveform is represented by the color.
•Line:Thewaveformisrepresentedbyoutline.
FFT Scope Waveform Color
51 153 255
Set the waveform color for the FFT scope. •ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•Push[F-3• ] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
•ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
FFT Scope Waveform Display
ON
Select the waterfall display ON or OFF. •ON :Displaysthewaterfallon theFFT
scope.
•OFF :Doesnotdisplaythewaterfall.
Oscilloscope Waveform Color
0255 0
Set the waveform color for the Oscilloscope. •ThecolorissetinRGBformat.
•Push[F-3• ] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
•ThesetcolorisindicatedintheboxbesidetheRGB
scale.
D Audio scope set mode
This set mode is used to set the FFT scope waveform
type, color, waterfall display and oscilloscope wave-
form color.
q During audio scope display ON, push [SET] F-7
to select the Audio scope set mode screen.
w Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
set item.
e Set the desired condition using the main dial.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the de-
fault condition or value.
•Push[t u] F-3 to select the set contents for some
items.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitfromsetmode.
F-1 F-4
DEF
F-2
F-3
EXIT/SET
Autotune function
The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed
frequency(maximumCW:±500Hz,AM:±5kHz)au-
tomatically when an off-frequency signal is received.
This function is active while in CW or AM mode is se-
lected.
Push [AUTOTUNE] to toggle the autotune function
ON or OFF.
•
AUTOTUNE blinks when autotune function is acti-
vated.
After2secondshaspassed,theautotunefunction
stops tuning automatically even it’s still off-frequency.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning function
may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
Appears
AUTOTUNE
AUTO
TUNE
6-1
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 6
VOXfunction ..................................................................................... 6-2
DUsingtheVOXfunction ................................................................ 6-2
DAdjustingtheVOXfunction ........................................................... 6-2
DVOXsetmode .............................................................................. 6-2
Break-in function ............................................................................... 6-3
D Semi break-in operation ............................................................... 6-3
D Full break-in operation .................................................................. 6-3
TX function ..................................................................................... 6-4
D TX monitor function .................................................................... 6-4
Monitor function ................................................................................ 6-4
Transmit filter width setting (SSB only) ............................................. 6-5
Speech compressor (SSB only) ........................................................ 6-5
Split frequency operation .................................................................. 6-6
Quick split function ........................................................................... 6-7
D Split lock function ......................................................................... 6-7
6-2
VOX function
TheVOX(Voice-OperatedTransmission)function
switches between transmit and receive with your
voice. This function provides “hands-free” operation.
D Using the VOX function
q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).
w Push VOX toturntheVOXfunctionONorOFF.
•“ VOX ”appearswhiletheVOXisinuse.
•[VOX]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
D Adjusting the VOX function
q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).
w Push VOX toturnVOXfunctionON.
e While speaking into the microphone with your
normalvoicelevel,rotate[VOXGAIN]tothepoint
where the transceiver is continuously transmitting.
rDuring receive, rotate [ANTIVOX]to thepoint
where the transceiver does not switch to transmit
due to received audio from the speaker.
tAdjusttheVOXdelayandtheVOXvoicedelayin
VOXsetmode,ifnecessary.
D VOX set mode
q Hold down VOX for1secondtoenterVOXset
mode.
w Select the desired item using [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 .
e Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or
condition.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select a default
value.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitVOXsetmode.
[VOX GAIN] [ANTI VOX]
AM/FM
SSBVOX
AM/FM
SSB
VOX
6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
VOX Delay
0.2s
SettheVOXdelayforaconvenientintervalbefore
returning to receive within 0 to 2.0 seconds range.
VOX Voice Delay
OFF
SettheVOXvoicedelaytopreventclippingofthe
first few syllables of a transmission when switching
to transmit.
Short, Mid., Long and OFF settings are available.
When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX
monitor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio
from be echoed.
6-3
Break-in function
The break-in function is used in CW mode to auto-
matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and
receive when keying. The IC-7700 is capable of full
break-in or semi break-in.
D Semi break-in operation
During semi break-in operation, the transceiver im-
mediately transmits when keyed and during key up
periods returns to receive after a pre-set delay.
q Push CW to select CW or CW-R mode.
w Push BK-IN once or twice to turn the semi
break-in function ON.
•“ BKIN ” appears.
e Rotate [DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the
delay from transmit to receive).
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to ad-
just the keying speed.
D Full break-in operation
During full break-in operation, the transceiver immedi-
ately transmits when keyed and during key up periods
immediately returns to receive.
q Push CW to select CW or CW-R mode.
w Push BK-IN once or twice to turn the full break-in
function ON.
•“ F-BKIN ” appears.
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to ad-
just the keying speed.
BK-IN
CW
[DELAY] (outer control)
[KEY SPEED] (inner control)
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
6-4
TX function
The TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to
±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancel-
ling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive
frequency.
q Push TX .
•“
TX
appears.
w Rotate [RIT/TX].
e To reset the TX frequency, hold down CLEAR
for 1 second.
•Push CLEAR momentarily to reset the TX frequency
when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON. (p. 12-15)
r To cancel the TX function, push TX again.
•“
TX
disappears.
D TX monitor function
When the TX function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-
lows you to monitor the operating frequency directly.
For your convenience— Calculate function
The frequency shift of the TX function can be
added/subtracted to the displayed frequency.
While displaying the TX shift frequency, hold
down TX for 1 second.
Monitor function
The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice
characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-
ter (p. 12-5). The CW sidetone functions regardless of
the MONITOR switch setting.
q Push MONITOR to switch the monitor function ON
and OFF.
•[MONITOR]indicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreen.
w Rotate [MONI GAIN] for the clearest audio output
while pushing [PTT] and speaking into the micro-
phone.
NOTE: When using theVOX voice delay, turn the
monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be
echoed.
[RIT/TX]
TX CLEAR
XFC
[MONI GAIN]
MONITOR
6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
6-5
Transmit filter width setting (SSB only)
The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be se-
lected from wide, middle and narrow.
During USB or LSB mode selection, hold down
[COMP] (MF6) for 1 second several times to select
the desired transmit filter width from wide, middle
and narrow.
•Thefiltercanbeindependentlysetonthespeechcom-
pressor function is ON or OFF.
•Thefollowingfiltersarespecifiedasthedefault.Eachof
the filter width can be re-set in level set mode. (p. 12-6)
WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz
MID : 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz
NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz
Speech compressor (SSB only)
The speech compressor increases average RF output
power in SSB mode only, improving signal strength
and readability.
q Select USB or LSB mode and adjust [MIC] to a
suitable level.
•Push[METER](MF2) several times to select the ALC
meter for microphone gain adjustment.
w Push [COMP] (MF6) to turn the speech compressor
ON.
e Push [METER] (MF2) once to select the COMP
meter.
r While speaking into the microphone, rotate [COMP]
control, so that the COMP meter reads within the
COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal
voice level.
WhentheCOMPmeterpeaksexceed20dB,
your transmitted voice may be distorted.
t Push [METER] (MF2) 5 times to select the ALC
meter.
y While speaking into the microphone, rotate
[DRIVE],sothattheALCmeterreadswithinthe
30 to 50% range of the ALC zone with your normal
voice level.
For your convenience
Hold down [METER] (MF2) for 1 second to display
the multi-function meter that can check the ALC and
COMP level at a glance.
S
ID
0
510
15
0
010
44
ALC 52V VD
20
dB
11.5 23
10 50 100 150 200 250
PO
SWR
COMP
A
W
1
59+20 +40 +60dB
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
COMP zone
[MIC]
[DRIVE] [COMP] control
P.AMP
COMPMETER
COMP
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Split frequency operation
Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and
receive in the same mode on two different frequen-
cies. Split frequency operation is performed using 2
frequencies on the main and sub readouts.
Thefollowingisanexampleofsetting21.290MHzfor
receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.
qSet21.290MHz(USB)inVFOmode.
w Push SPLIT momentarily, then hold down A=B
for 1 second.
•Thequicksplitfunctionismuchmoreconvenientforse-
lectingthetransmitfrequency.Seethenextsectionfor
details.
•Theequalizedtransmitfrequencyand
SPLIT
ap-
pear on the LCD.
•[SPLIT]indicatorlights.
•“TX”appearstoshowthetransmitfrequencyreadout.
e Set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz in the
following way.
Rotate the main dial while pushing [XFC].
Thetransmitfrequencycanbemonitoredwhile
pushing [XFC].
r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit
on 21.310 MHz.
To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push
A/B toexchangethemainandsubreadouts.
CONVENIENT
• Direct shift frequency input
The shift frequency can be entered directly.
q Push F-INP
ENT .
w Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys.
•1kHzto9.999MHzcanbeset.
Whenyourequireanegativeshiftdirection,push
in advance.
e Push SPLIT .
•Theshiftfrequencyisinputinthesubreadoutandthe
split function is turned ON.
[Example]
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push F-INP
ENT , 1.8 1 then SPLIT .
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push F-INP
ENT , GENE , 7 3 then SPLIT .
• Split lock function
Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main
dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,
use both the split lock and dial lock functions to
change the transmit frequency only. The split lock
function cancels the dial lock function while pushing
[XFC] during split frequency operation.
The dial lock’s effect during split frequency operation
can be selected in the set mode for both receive and
transmit frequencies; or only the receive frequency.
(p. 12-13)
• The split frequency operation is ready
• When the split function ON
• When [XFC] is pushed
6-6
Main dial
[SPLIT] indicator
SPLIT
A/B A=B
XFC
6FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
GENE
6-7
Quick split function
When you find a DX station, an important considera-
tion is how to set the split frequency.
When you hold down the SPLIT switch for 1 second,
split frequency operation is turned ON and the trans-
mit frequency is equalized to the received frequency.
This shortens the time needed to begin split fre-
quency operation.
The quick split function is ON by default. For your
convenience, it can be turned OFF in Others set
mode. (p. 12-13) In this case, the SPLIT switch does
not equalize the transmit frequency to the receive fre-
quency.
q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB)
inVFOmode.
w Hold down SPLIT for 1 second.
•SplitfrequencyoperationisturnedON.
•Thetransmitfrequency(unselectedVFO’sreadout)is
equalizedtothereceivefrequency(selectedVFO’srea-
dout).
•
SPLIT
indicator appears.
e Enter the desired offset frequency from the keypad
then push SPLIT , or set the transmit frequency
with the main dial while pushing [XFC].
•
F-INP
indicator appears when F-INP
ENT is pushed.
•Offsetfrequencysettingwiththekeypad—example
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push F-INP
ENT , 1.8 1 then SPLIT .
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push F-INP
ENT , GENE , 7 3 then SPLIT .
D Split lock function
The split lock function is convenient for changing only
the transmit frequency. When the split lock function
is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotat-
ing the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The
split lock function is ON by default, but can be turned
OFF in set mode. (p. 12-13)
q While split frequency operation is ON, push [LOCK]
to activate the split lock function.
w While pushing [XFC], rotate the main dial to
change the transmit frequency.
•Ifyouaccidentallyrelease[XFC]whilerotatingthemain
dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.
Main dial
[SPLIT] indicator
SPLIT
XFC
Main dial
[LOCK] indicator
XFC
LOCK
6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
7-1
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 7
Recording a QSO audio ……………………………………………… 7-2
D To start or stop recording …………………………………………… 7-2
Recording quick operation …………………………………………… 7-2
D To start or stop recording …………………………………………… 7-2
Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) …………………………… 7-3
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-3
D Operating while playing back ……………………………………… 7-4
Deleting recorded audio file …………………………………………… 7-5
Deleting recorded audio folder ………………………………………… 7-5
AboutdigitalVoiceRecorder ………………………………………… 7-6
Recording a received audio (Short REC) …………………………… 7-7
D One-touch recording ………………………………………………… 7-7
Playing back the recorded audio (Short REC) ……………………… 7-7
D Basic playing ………………………………………………………… 7-7
D One-touch playing …………………………………………………… 7-8
Protect the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-8
Erasing the recorded contents ………………………………………… 7-8
Recording a message for transmit …………………………………… 7-9
D Recording …………………………………………………………… 7-9
D Confirming a message for transmit ………………………………… 7-9
Programming a memory name ……………………………………… 7-10
Sending a recorded message ………………………………………… 7-11
D Single TX ……………………………………………………………… 7-11
D Repeat TX …………………………………………………………… 7-11
D Transmit level setting ……………………………………………… 7-12
Voicesetmode ………………………………………………………… 7-13
Saving a voice memory into the memory device …………………… 7-15
D Saving the received audio memory ……………………………… 7-15
D Saving the TX memory ……………………………………………… 7-15
7-2
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Recording a QSO audio
Recording quick operation
TheVoicerecorderfunctionrecordsaQSO(communi-
cation) audio onto a USB flash drive.
This function enables you to record both received and
transmitted audio, a QSO with a DX’pedition, and play-
back the recorded audio after the QSO.
D To start or stop recording
EXIT/SET
F-2
QSO REC
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoiceRecorder
menu.
e Hold down [QSO REC] F-4 for 1 second to start
voice recording.
•The indicator appears and the
indicator
blinks.
•Recordingiscontinuousuntilyoumanuallystoprecord-
ing, or the USB flash drive becomes full.
•If the recording le’s content reaches 2GB, the trans-
ceiver automatically creates a new le, and continues
recording.
•The indicator appears instead of the indicator
while recording is paused.
r Hold down [QSO REC] F-4 for 1 second to stop
recording.
•The indicator disappears and the
indicator
stops blinking.
t Push EXIT/SET toexittheVoiceRecorderscreen.
D To start or stop recording
REC
q Hold down REC for 1 second to start voice record-
ing.
•The indicator appears and the
indicator
blinks.
w Hold down REC for 1 second again to stop record-
ing.
Convenient!
When the PTT Automatic Recording function is set to
ONintheVoicesetmode,therecordingautomatically
starts when you push [PTT]. (p. 7-14)
NOTE:
•Be sure to connect a USB ash drive before re-
cording a QSO audio.
•  Once recording starts, it continues, even if the
transceiver is turned OFF and then ON again.
7-3
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Playing back the recorded audio (QSO)
D Basic playing
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoiceRecorder
menu.
e Push [QSO PLAY] F-5 to call up the voice QSO
player screen.
•Thefolderlistisdisplayed.
•Thefoldernameisformattedyyyymmdd(yyyy:year,
mm: month, dd: day).
r Push [p] F-1 or [q] F-2 to select the folder that
contains the file you want to play.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsoselectsthefolder.
t Push [FILE] F-3 to open the folder .
•Thefilelistisdisplayed.
•Thefilenameisformattedyyyy-mm-ddhh:mm:ss(yyyy:
year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss:
second).
y Push [p] F-1 or [q] F-2 to select the file that
you want to play.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsoselectsthefile.
u Push [PLAY] F-3 to start playback.
•Tthe“
” indicator blinks.
•Playbackcontinuestonextfile,anditisterminated
when the bottom file in the folder is played.
i Push EXIT/SET severaltimestoexittheQSOplayer
screen.
F-3
PLAY
F-1
F-2
Progress bar
Shows the play
back progress
bar.
Total time
Shows the le’s total
playback time.
Playback mark
Appears while the audio is playing back.
•Themarkdisappearswhilepausing.
Played back time
Shows the played back time.
Blinks
7-4
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
D Operating while playing back
You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.
• Fast forward while playing
Push [] F-4 to fast forward to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
You can change the skip time in the voice set mode.
(p. 7-14)
• Rewind while playing
Push [] F-2 to rewind to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
You can change the skip time in the voice set mode.
(p. 7-14)
•If you push [] F-2 within the rst second of the le,
theskiptimeattheendofthepreviouslyrecordedlewill
playback.
• Pause while playing
Push [ ] F-3 to pause.
•Touch[ ] F-3 again to resume.
• Playing the previous le
Push [] F-1 toplaythepreviousle.
•Incasethereareotherlesinthefolder,whiletheoldest
le is playing back, Push [] F-1 to start playing the
beginningofthele.
• Playing the next le
Push [] F-5 toplaythenextle.
•Incasethereareotherlesinthefolder,whilethemost
recentleisplayingback,Push[] F-5 to stop the play-
back.
• Moving to the beginning of the previous le
When the playback is paused anywhere within the
le,Push[] F-2 one or more times to return to
thebeginningofthele,andpause.
•Push[ ] F-3 to play it back.
Whentheplaybackispausedatbeginningofale,
Push [] F-1 to move to the beginning of the previ-
ousle,andpause.
•Push[ ] F-3 to play it back.
• Moving to the beginning of the next le
When the playback is paused, Push [] F-5 to
movetothebeginningofthenextle,andpause.
•Push[ ] F-3 to play it back.
F-3 F-4
F-5
F-6
STOP
F-1
F-2
Play the previous file
Rewind
Pause or play
Forward
Play the next file
Stop playing
Convenient!
Youcanfastforwardorrewindthelethatisplayingby
rotating the main dial.
The fast forward/rewind time is one twentieth of the
totalletime,regardlessoftheskiptimesetting.
Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) (continued)
Holding down the switch repeats the action until it is
released (other than the [ ] F-3 switch).
Example:Holddown[] F-4 to repeat skipping 10
seconds until you release the [] F-4 switch.
(Default: 10 seconds)
7-5
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Deleting recorded audio file
F-5
DEL
F-1
F-2
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoiceRecorder
menu.
e Push [QSO PLAY] F-5 to call up the voice QSO
player screen.
•Thefolderlistisdisplayed.
•Thefoldernameisformattedyyyymmdd(yyyy:year,
mm: month, dd: day).
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the folder that
contains the file you want to delete.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsoselectsthefolder.
t Push [FILE] F-3 to open the folder .
•Thefilelistisdisplayed.
•Thefilenameisformattedyyyy-mm-ddhh:mm:ss(yyyy:
year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss:
second).
y Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the file that you
want to delete.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsoselectsthefile.
u Hold down [DEL] F-5 for 1 second to delete the
file.
•Theconfirmationwindow“Areyousure?”appears.
i Push [OK] F-6 to delete the file.
•Theselectedfileisdeleted.
•Push EXIT/SET to cancel deleting.
o Push EXIT/SET severaltimestoexittheQSOplayer
screen.
Deleting recorded audio folder
F-5
DEL
F-1
F-2
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoiceRecorder
menu.
e Push [QSO PLAY] F-5 to call up the voice QSO
player screen.
•Thefolderlistisdisplayed.
•Thefoldernameisformattedyyyymmdd(yyyy:year,
mm: month, dd: day).
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the folder that
you want to delete.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsoselectsthefolder.
t Hold down [DEL] F-5 for 1 second to delete the
folder.
•Theconfirmationwindow“Areyousure?”appears.
y Push [OK] F-6 to delete the folder.
•Theselectedfolderisdeleted.
•Push EXIT/SET to cancel deleting.
u Push EXIT/SET severaltimestoexittheQSOplayer
screen.
7-6
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
About digital Voice Recorder
The IC-7700 has digital voice memories, up to 4 mes-
sages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for re-
ceive.
Amaximummessagelengthof30secondscanbere-
corded into a receive memory (total message length
for all channels of up to 209 seconds) and a total mes-
sage length of up to 99 seconds can be recorded in
transmit memory.
The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated
CQandexchangetransmissionsincontests,aswell
as when making repeated calls during DX’peditions.
EXIT/SETREC PLAYF-1 F-2
q Select any mode.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 to display voice recorder menu.
e Push [PLAY] F-1 or [MIC REC] F-2 to select the
desired memory channel screen, then record audio
or playback the contents as described below.
r Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitvoicerecorderscreen.
• About recording received audio and playing back the contents
• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily
• Playing back the all contents in a channel • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel
15 sec.
(default)
30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)
3 sec.
Push momentarily
records the contents of
the previous 15 sec.*
When is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*
from the last operation, all the contents between
operations will be recorded.
*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-13).
*The playing back time period can be changed with
“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 7-13).
NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory
channels automatically.
REC
REC
REC
REC
Push momentarily
REC
Push momentarily
REC
Push momentarily.
PLAY
Or, hold down for 1 sec.
PLAY
Push momentarily.
F-3
PLAY
7-7
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Playing back the recorded audio (Short REC)
D Basic playing
F-3
PLAY
F-1
F-2
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoicerecorder
menu.
e Push [PLAY] F-1 todisplaytheVoice recorder
screen.
•Previouslyselectedscreen,TXorRXmemory,isdis-
played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears,
push [T/R] F-7 to select RX memory message.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
voice memory to playback.
Appears
Appears
Counts down
t Push [PLAY] F-3 to start playback.
•“
PLAY
indicators appear and the timer counts down.
y Push [PLAY] F-3 again to stop playback if de-
sired.
•Playbackisterminatedautomaticallywhenallofthere-
corded contents in the message are played.
u Push EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
Recording a received audio (Short REC)
Up to 20 channels of receive voice memories are
available in the IC-7700. And the total audio length
of up to 209 seconds can be recorded in receive
channels.However,themaximumrecordablelength
into a single memory is 30 seconds.
ThisVoiceRecorderdoesnotrecordonlythereceived
audio, but also the information such as set operating
frequency, mode, and the recording time for your fu-
ture reference.
D One-touch recording
REC
Push REC momentarily to records the previous 15
seconds audio.
•Therecordabletimeperiodcanbesetinvoicesetmode.
(p. 7-13)
•Theoperatingfrequency,modeandcurrenttimeareau-
tomatically programmed as the memory names.
NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) within
the set period, no audio will be recorded.
IMPORTANT!
When you record the 21st audio segment, or when
thetotalaudiolengthexceeds209seconds,theold-
est recorded audio is automatically erased to make
room for the new audio.
7-8
7PANEL DESCRIPTION
Playing the recorded audio (continued)
D One-touch playing
The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be
played back without selecting voice recorder screen.
PLAY
➥ Push PLAY momentarily to play back the last 5
seconds of the previously recorded audio.
•“
PLAY
indicator appears.
•Playbackisterminatedautomaticallyafter5seconds.
•Theplaybacktimeperiodcanbesetinvoicesetmode.
(p. 7-13)
Hold down PLAY for 1 second to playback all of the
previously recorded audio.
•“
PLAY
indicator appears.
•Playbackisterminatedautomaticallywhenallofthere-
corded contents in the channel are played.
Protect the recorded contents
The protect function is available to protect the recorded
contents from accidental erasure, such as over-writing,
etc.
F-4
PROTECT
F-1
F-2
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoicerecorder
menu.
e Push [PLAY] F-1 todisplaytheVoice recorder
screen.
•Previouslyselectedscreen,TXorRXmemory,isdis-
played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears,
push [T/R] F-7 to select RX memory message.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
voice message.
t Push [PROTECT] F-4 to turn the protect function
ON or OFF.
•“ indicator appears when the contents is protected.
y Push EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder
menu.
Erasing the recorded contents
The recorded contents can be erased independently
by message.
F-5
CLR
F-1
F-2
q Perform the steps q to e as Protect the re-
corded contents” above.
w Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
voice message to be erased.
e Hold down [CLR] F-5 for 1 second to erase the
contents.
•Push[PROTECT] F-4 to release the protection in ad-
vance if necessary.
r Push EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder
menu.
7-9
7
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Recording a message for transmit
TotransmitamessageusingtheVoicerecorder,record
the desired message in advance as described below.
The IC-7700 has digital voice memories for transmis-
sion, up to 4 messages and you can record message
in length of up to 99 seconds.
D Recording
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoicerecorder
menu.
e Push [MIC REC] F-2 to select the voice mic.
record screen.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
message.
t Hold down [REC] F-4 for 1 second to start record-
ing.
•“
REC
indicator appears.
•Speakintothemicrophonewithoutholdingdown[PTT].
•Previouslyrecordedcontentsarecleared.
•Audiooutputfromtheinternalspeakerisautomatically
muted.
y While speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC] control so that the
[MIC-RECLEVEL]indicatorreadswithin100%.
u Push [REC] F-4 momentarily to stop recording.
•Therecordingisterminatedautomaticallywhenthere-
maining time becomes 0 second.
i Push EXIT/SET twice to exit theVoice recorder
menu.
D Confirming a message for transmit
q Perform the steps q to e as “D Recording” above.
w Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
message.
e Push [PLAY] F-3 to playback the recorded con-
tents.
•“
PLAY
indicator appears.
r Push [PLAY] F-3 again to stop playback.
•Playbackisterminatedautomaticallywhenallofthere-
corded contents in the message are played.
t Push EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
F-4
REC
F-1
F-2
Appears Adjust [MIC] control so that this
indicator reads within 100%.
F-3
PLAY
F-1
F-2
7-10
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Programming a memory name
Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric
names of up to 20 characters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @)
and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)
q Record a message as described in page 7-9.
w During the voice mic. record screen display, push
[NAME] F-5 to enter memory name edit condition.
•Acursorappearsandblinks.
e Push [T1..T4] F-7 several times to select the de-
sired voice message.
r Input the desired character by rotating the main dial
or by pushing the band key for number input.
•Push[ABC](MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and
small letters.
•Push[123](MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals
and symbols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
•Push[SPACE] F-4 to input a space.
Pushingthetransceiver’skeypad,[0]–[9],canalso
enter numerals.
t Push EXIT/SET to input and set the name.
•Thecursordisappears.
y Repeat steps e to t to program another voice
message’s name, if desired.
u Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitthevoicerecorder
screen.
• Voice memory name editing example • Usable characters
For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can
also be edited from the keyboard.
Keypad
T1..T4
F-7
//
F-3
DEL
123 Symbol ABC abc
F-1
F-2
F-4
SPACE
Key selection Editable characters
A to Z (capital letters)
a to z (small letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ` ^ + / . , : ; =
< > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @
ABC
abc
123
Symbol
7-11
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Sending a recorded message
D Single TX
F-1
T1
F-2
T2
F-3
T3
F-4
T4
F-7
T/R
EXIT/SET
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Select a phone mode by pushing SSB or AM/FM .
ePush [VOICE] F-2 to enter theVoice recorder
menu.
r Push [PLAY] F-1 to enter the Voice recorder
screen.
•Ifthereceivevoicemessageappears,push[T/R] F-7
to select TX message (T1–T4).
t Push a desired message switch, [T1] F-1 to
[T4] F-4 , to transmit the contents.
Appears Counts down
•Thetransceivertransmitsautomatically.
•
SEND
indicator appears and the memory timer
counts down.
•Youhearthetransmittedmessagefromthespeakeras
the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.
(p. 7-13)
y Push the selected message switch, [T1] F-1 to
[T4] F-4 , again to stop, if desired.
•Thetransceiverreturnstoreceiveautomaticallywhenall
of the recorded contents in the message are transmit-
ted.
u Push EXIT/SET twice to exit the voice memory
screen.
D Repeat TX
F-1
T1
F-2
T2
F-3
T3
F-4
T4
F-7
T/R
EXIT/SET
q Perform steps q to r above.
w Hold down a desired message switch, [T1] F-1 to
[T4] F-4 , for 1 second to repeatedly transmit the
recorded voice audio for up to 10 minutes at the
interval specified in “Repeat Time.”
•Evenif10minutespasswhiletransmitting,thevoice
audio is completely transmitted.
•Oneofthefollowingstepswillcancelthetransmission.
- Push the memory again.
-Pushanothermemory(exceptfor[TXLEV.]).
Appears Repeat indicator
-ExittheTXVoicememoryscreen.
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
- Activate the transmission.
The repeat transmission is cancelled. But while trans-
mitting, the voice audio is completely transmitted.
•OncetheRepeatTXismade,thetransceiverpauses
until the end of the “Repeat Time,” then transmits again.
After the second transmission, the Repeat TX continues
pausing, if receiving a signal. But if the squelch is manu-
ally opened, the voice audio is repeatedly transmitted,
according to the repeat time setting.
For your convenience
WhenanexternalkeypadorPCkeyboardisconnected,therecordedmessage,T1toT4,canbetransmitted
withoutopeningtheVoiceRecorderscreen.Seepages2-6,2-7and12-17fordetails.
•Therecordedmessage,T1toT4istransmittedoncewhenpushingoneoffourswitchesontheexternalkeypad;there-
corded message is repeatedly transmitted when holding down a switch.
•Therecordedmessage,T1toT4istransmittedoncewhenpushingoneof[F1]to[F4]keyonthePCkeyboard;there-
corded message is repeatedly transmitted when pushing a key while holding down [SHIFT] key.
7-12
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Sending a recorded message (continued)
D Transmit level setting
Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-6
TX LEV.
F-7
DEF
qCalluptheVoicerecorderscreenasdescribed
above.
wPush[TXLEV.] F-6 to select the voice memory
transmit level set condition.
e Push the desired message switch, [T1] F-1 to
[T4] F-4 , momentarily to transmit the contents.
•Thetransceivertransmitsautomatically.
•
SEND
indicator appears and the memory timer
counts down.
r Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice
level.
•Holddown[DEF] F-7 for 1 second to select the default
condition.
t Push EXIT/SET to return to the voice recorder
screen.
7-13
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Voice set mode
Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and
normal recording times for voice recorder.
Main dial
F-4
DEF
F-1
F-2
EXIT/SET
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wPush[VOICE] F-2 todisplaytheVoicerecorder
menu.
e Push [SET] F-7 to select voice set mode screen.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
item.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired condition or
value.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the default
condition or value.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitthevoicesetmodescreen.
Voice 1st Menu
VOICE-Root
SelectVOICE-RootorVOICE-PLAYasthemenu
thatappearsfirstafterpushing[VOICE] F-2 .
•VOICE-Root :Thevoicemenuappearsfirst.
•VOICE-PLAY :EithertheRXorTXvoiceRecorder
screen appears first.
Auto Monitor
ON
Turn on the automatic monitor function for recorded
audio contents transmission.
•ON :Monitorstransmitaudioautomaticallywhen
sending a recorded audio.
OFF :Monitorstransmitaudioonlywhenthe
monitor function is in use.
Repeat Time
5s
Set the repeat interval for the voice repeat trans-
mission to between 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second
steps).
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio at this interval.
Short Play Time
5s
Set the desired time period for one-touch playback
(when PLAY is pushed momentarily).
•3to10secondsin1secondstepscanbeset.
(default: 5 seconds)
Normal Rec Time
15s
Set the desired time period for one-touch recording
(when REC is pushed momentarily).
•5to30secondsin1secondstepscanbeset.
(default: 15 seconds)
7-14
7VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
QSO REC Mode
TX&RX
Select the recording mode for recording a QSO
audio.
•TX&RX:Recordsboththetransmittedandreceived
audio.
•RXonly:Recordsonlythereceivedaudio.
RX REC Condition Squelch Auto
Select whether or not the squelch status affects the
RX voice audio recording.
•Always: Thetransceiveralwaysrecordsthe
RX audio, regardless of the squelch
status.
•SquelchAuto:ThetransceiverrecordstheRXaudio
only when a signal is received (the
squelch is opened).
When the squelch closes while re-
cording, the recording will continue
for 2 seconds, and then pause.
File Split
ON
Turn the File Split function ON or OFF. •OFF:Theaudioiscontinuouslyrecordedintothe
file, even if you switch between transmit and
receive or the squelch status changes be-
tween open and closed.
•ON: Whilerecording,andifyouswitchbetween
transmit and receive, or the squelch status
changes between open and closed, a new file
is automatically created in the same folder,
and the audio is saved into the new one.
PTT Auto REC
OFF
Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or
OFF.
•OFF:Therecordingdoesnotstartevenifasignalis
transmitted.
•ON: Therecordingautomaticallystartswhenasig-
nal is transmitted.
The recording will continue when:
•Asignalistransmittedagainwithin10seconds
after the last transmission.
•Asignalisreceivedwithin10secondsafterthe
last transmission, the received audio is also re-
corded.
- A signal is received within 10 seconds after the
last reception.
•ThesquelchisopenintheFMmodes.
The recording will stop when:
•Thefrequencyoroperatingmodeischanged.
•Theoperatingmethod(V/M,M-CH,BandStack-
ing Register, and so on) is changed.
•10minuteshaspastafterthelasttransmission
while the squelch is open in the SSB, CW, RTTY,
PSK or AM modes.
QSO PLAY Skip Time
10s
Set the Skip time for forwarding or rewinding while
playing back the QSO audio.
3, 5, 10 and 30 seconds are selectable.
Voice set mode (continued)
7-15
7
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Saving a voice message into the USB flash drive
D Saving the received audio memory
The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into
the USB flash drive.
qDuringVoicerecorderRXmemoryscreendisplay,
push[SAVE] F-6 to select voice file save screen.
Previouslyselectedscreen,TXorRXmemory,is
displayed. If the TX message (T1–T4) appears, push
[T/R] F-7 to select RX message.
w Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] F-4 to select file name edit
condition.
•Push[DIR/FILE] F-1 several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
•[ABC](MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^
– ( ) { } _ ~ @ can be selected.
•Push[t] F-1 to move the cursor left, push [u]
F-2 to move the cursor right, push [DEL] F-3
to delete a character and push [SPACE] F-4 to
insert a space.
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB flash drive.
•Push[t u] F-4 to select the upper directory.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select folder in the
same directory.
•Holddown[t u] F-4 for 1 second to select a
folder in the directory.
•Push[REN/DEL] F-5 to rename the folder.
•Holddown[REN/DEL] F-5 for 1 second to de-
lete the folder.
•Holddown[MAKE] F-6 for 1 second to making
a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
nerasthe“•Filename”above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 twice to select the file
name.
ePush[SAVE] F-6 .
•Afterthesavingiscompleted,returntovoicerecorder
RX memory screen automatically.
D Saving the TX memory
The TX memory contents can also be saved into the
USB flash drive. However, the contents are saved
with the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the
same time. See page 12-24 for details.
Main dial
DIR/FILE EXIT/SET
F-1
F-7
WIDE
F-6
SAVE
F-4
EDIT
• Voice recorder RX memory screen
• Voice file save screen— file name edit
• While saving
The USB flash drive is not supplied by Icom.
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the file name can also be
edited from the keyboard.
8-1
MEMORY OPERATION Section 8
Memory channels ............................................................................. 8-2
Memory channel selection ................................................................ 8-2
D Using the / keys ......................................................... 8-2
D Using the keypad .......................................................................... 8-2
Memory channel programming ......................................................... 8-3
DProgramminginVFOmode .......................................................... 8-3
D Programming in memory mode .................................................... 8-3
Frequency transfers .......................................................................... 8-4
DTransferringinVFOmode ............................................................. 8-4
D Transferring in memory mode ....................................................... 8-4
Memory list screen ........................................................................... 8-5
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen ........ 8-5
D Confirming programmed memory channels ................................. 8-5
Memory names ................................................................................. 8-6
D Editing (programming) memory names ........................................ 8-6
Memory clearing ............................................................................... 8-6
Memo pads ........................................................................................ 8-7
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads ......... 8-7
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad .................................... 8-7
8-2
Memory channels
The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory
mode is very useful for quickly changing to often-used
frequencies.
All 101 memory channels are tuneable which means
the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily
with the main dial, etc. in memory mode.
Memory channel selection
D Using the / keys
q Push V/M to select memory mode.
w Push / several times to select the de-
sired memory channel.
•Holddown / for continuous selection.
•[UP]and[DN]onthemicrophonecanalsobeused.
eToreturntoVFOmode,push V/M again.
D Using the keypad
q Push V/M to select memory mode.
w Push F-INP
ENT .
e Push the desired memory channel number using
the keypad.
•Enter100or101toselectscanedgechannelP1orP2,
respectively.
r Push or to select the desired memory
channel.
[EXAMPLE]
To select the memory channel 3;
- Push F-INP
ENT , 7 3, then push or .
To select the memory channel 12;
- Push F-INP
ENT , 1.8 1, 3.5 2, then push or
.
To select the scan edge channel P1;
- Push F-INP
ENT , 1.8 1, 50 0, 50 0, then
push or .
To select the scan edge channel P2;
- Push F-INP
ENT , 1.8 1, 50 0, 1.8 1, t hen
push or .
V/M
Y Z
Keypad F-IMP ENT
V/M
Y Z
8MEMORY OPERATION
MEMORY MEMORY TRANSFER OVER-
CHANNEL CHANNEL CAPABILITY TO VFO WRITING CLEAR
NUMBER
Regular memory 1–99 Yes Yes Yes
channels
Scan edge
memory P1, P2 Yes Yes No
channels
Independent transmit and
receive frequencies and modes
in each memory channel.
One frequency and one mode in
each memory channel as scan
edges for programmed scan.
8-3
8
MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channel programming
Memory channel programming can be preformed ei-
therinVFOmodeorinmemorymode.
D Programming in VFO mode
q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
terwidthinVFOmode.
w Push / several times to select the de-
sired memory channel.
•Memorylistscreenisconvenientforselectingthede-
sired channel.
•Memorychannelcontentsappearinthememorychan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
•“--.---.--”appearsiftheselectedmemorychannelisa
blank channel (and does not have contents).
e Hold down MW for 1 second to program the
displayed frequency, operating mode, etc., into the
memory channel.
D Programming in memory mode
q Select the desired memory channel with /
in memory mode.
•Memorychannelcontentsappearinthememorychan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
•“--.---.--”appearsiftheselectedmemorychannelisa
blank channel (and does not have contents).
w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in
memory mode.
•Toprogramablankchannel,usedirectfrequencyentry
with the keypad or memo pads, etc.
e Hold down MW for 1 second to program the
displayed frequency and operating mode into the
memory channel.
MW
Y Z
or
Hold down for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
MW
SSB
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12.
or then
Hold down for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
7
21
MW
SSB
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 18.
Frequency transfers
The frequency and operating mode in a memory
channelcanbetransferredtotheVFO.Frequency
transferscanbeperformedineitherVFOmodeor
memory mode.
D Transferring in VFO mode
This is useful for transferring programmed contents to
aVFO.
qSelectVFOmodewith V/M .
w
Select the memory channel to be transferred with
/ .
•Memorylistscreenisconvenientforselectingthede-
sired channel.
•Memorychannelcontentsappearinthememorychan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
•“--.---.--”appearsiftheselectedmemorychannelisa
blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible.
e Hold down V/M for 1 second to transfer the fre-
quency and operating mode.
•Transferredfrequencyandoperatingmodeappearon
the frequency readout.
D Transferring in memory mode
This is useful for transferring frequency and operating
mode while operating in memory mode.
When you have changed the frequency or operat-
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
•Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are
transferred.
•Programmed frequency and mode in the mem-
ory channel are not transferred, and they remain
in the memory channel.
q Select the memory channel to be transferred with
/ in memory mode.
•And,setthefrequencyoroperatingmodeifrequired.
w Hold down V/M for 1 second to transfer the fre-
quency and operating mode.
Displayedfrequencyandoperatingmodearetrans-
ferredtotheVFO.
eToreturntoVFOmode,push V/M momentarily.
8-4
8MEMORY OPERATION
TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE
Operatingfrequency:21.320MHz/USB(VFO)
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
or
Hold down for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
V/M
TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE
VFOfrequency :21.320MHz/USB
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
Hold down for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
Programmed contents appear.
V/M
8-5
8
MEMORY OPERATION
Memory list screen
The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9
memory channels and their programmed contents.
15 memory channels can be displayed in the wide
memory list screen.
You can select a desired memory channel from the
memory list screen.
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] F-4 to select memory list
screen.
•[WIDE] F-7 switches the standard and wide screens.
e While holding down [ROLL] F-1 , rotate the main
dial to select the desired memory channel.
• and can also be used.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitmemorylistscreen.
• Memory list screen
D Confirming programmed memory channels
q Select memory list screen as described above.
w While pushing [ROLL] F-1 , rotate the main dial to
scroll the screen.
e Push [SET] F-2 to select the highlighted memory
channel, if desired.
•u appears beside the selected memory channel
number in the memory list screen and the selected
memory channel contents are displayed below the fre-
quency readout.
r Push EXIT/SET toexitmemorylistscreen.
Main dial
F-2
SET
F-1
ROLL EXIT/SET
Main dial
Z Y
F-7
WIDE
F-1
ROLL
F-4
MEMORY EXIT/SET
8-6
8MEMORY OPERATION
Memory names
All memory channels (including scan edges) can be
tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @)
and spaces can be used.
D Editing (programming) memory names
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w
Push [MEMORY]
F-4
to select memory list screen.
e Select the desired memory channel.
r Push [NAME] F-4 to edit memory channel name.
•Acursorappearsandblinks.
•Memorychannelnamesofblankchannelscannotbe
edited.
t Input the desired character by rotating the main dial
or by pushing the keypad for number input.
•Push[ABC]or[abc]totogglecapitalandsmallletters.
•
Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
•Push[SPACE] F-4 to input a space.
Pushingthetransceiver’skeypad,[0]–[9],canalso
enter numerals.
y Push EXIT/SET to input and set the name.
•Thecursordisappears.
u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory
channel’s name, if desired.
i Push EXIT/SET toexitmemorylistscreen.
For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connec-
tor on the front panel, the memory name can also be
edited from the keyboard.
Memory clearing
Any unused memory channels can be cleared. The
cleared memory channels become blank channels.
q Select memory mode with V/M .
w
Push [MEMORY]
F-4
to select memory list screen.
e Select the desired memory channel with / .
r Hold down [CLR] F-5 for 1 second to clear the
contents.
•Theprogrammedfrequencyandoperatingmodedisap-
pear.
t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e
and r.
Hold down for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
(CLR)
F-5
F-5
CLR
Keypad
//
F-3
DEL
123 Symbol ABC abc
F-1
F-2
F-4
SPACE
8-7
8
MEMORY OPERATION
Memo pads
The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-
quency and operating mode for easy write and recall.
The memo pads are separate from memory channels.
The default number of memo pads is 5, however,
this can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired.
(p. 12-15)
Memo pads are convenient when you want to memo-
rize a frequency and operating mode temporarily,
such as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or
when a desired station is busy for a long time and you
want to temporarily search for other stations.
Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying
on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads
You can store the readout frequency and operating
mode by pushing MP-W .
When you store a 6th frequency and operating mode,
the oldest stored frequency and operating mode are
automatically erased to make room for the new set-
tings.
Each memo pad must have its own unique com-
bination of frequency and operating mode; memo
pads having identical settings cannot be written.
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad
You can call up the desired frequency and operating
mode of a memo pad by pushing MP-R several
times.
•BothVFOandmemorymodescanbeused.
•Thefrequencyandoperatingmodearecalledup,starting
from the most recently written.
When you call up a frequency and an operating mode
from memo pads with MP-R , the previously dis-
played frequency and operating mode are automati-
cally stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and
operating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled
by pushing MP-R several times.
•Youmaythinkthereare6memopadsbecause6different
frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the tempo-
rary pad) are called up by MP-R .
If you change the frequency or operating mode
called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc.,
the frequency and operating mode in the temporary
pad are erased.
MEMO PADS
MP-R
MP-R
Newest
Oldest
Newest
Erased
Oldest
In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be
erased when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written.
MP-W
MP-RMP-W
9-1
SCANS Section 9
Scan types ........................................................................................ 9-2
Preparation ....................................................................................... 9-2
Voicesquelchcontrolfunction .......................................................... 9-3
Scan set mode ................................................................................. 9-3
Programmed scan operation ............................................................ 9-4
F scan operation ............................................................................ 9-4
Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan .............................................. 9-5
Memory scan operation .................................................................... 9-6
Select memory scan operation ......................................................... 9-6
Setting select memory channels ...................................................... 9-7
D Setting in scan screen .................................................................. 9-7
D Setting in memory list screen ....................................................... 9-7
D Erasing the select scan setting .................................................... 9-7
Tone scan ......................................................................................... 9-8
9-2
Scan types
•Thescanfunctioncanbeusedonthemainread-
out only.
•Youcanperformascanwhileoperatingonafre-
quency using the split functions.
PROGRAMMED SCAN
Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).
This scan operates in VFO mode.
SELECT MEMORY SCAN
Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.
F SCAN
Repeatedly scans within F span area.
This scan operates in memory mode.This scan operates in memory mode.
This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.
Scan
Scan edge
P1 or P2
Scan edge
P2 or P1
Jump
MEMORY SCAN
Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.
Mch 1
1
Mch 5
1
Mch 2
2
Mch 3
1Mch 4
Mch 6
3
Mch 7
1
Mch 99
1
Mch 1
1
Mch 5
1
Mch 2
2
Mch 3
1Mch 4
Mch 6
3
Mch 7
1
Mch 99
1
Blank channel Blank channel
ScanScan
F frequency +F frequency
Start frequency
Jump
*“1,2” and “3” show that the channel
is specified as the select memory.
*“1,2” and “3” show that the channel
is specified as the select memory.
9SCANS
Preparation
• Channels
For programmed scan:
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-
ory channels P1 and P2.
For ΔF scan:
Set the ΔF span (ΔF scan range) in the scan screen.
For memory scan:
Program2ormorememorychannelsexceptscan
edge memory channels.
For select memory scan:
Designate 2 or more memory channels as select
memory channels. To designate the channel as a se-
lect memory channel, choose a memory channel,
then push [SELECT] F-3 in the scan screen (mem-
ory mode) or in the memory list screen.
• Scan resume ON/OFF
You can select the scan to resume or cancel when
detecting a signal in set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF
must be set before performing a scan. See page 9-3
for ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition de-
tails.
• Scan speed
Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or
low, in scan set mode. See page 9-3 for details.
• Squelch condition
Scan starts with squelch open
For programmed scan:
When tuning step is 1 kHz or less:
The scan continues until it is stopped manually— it
does not pause* even if signals are detected.
* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and
then opened (scan resumes after 10 seconds has
passed when the scan resume is ON; scan is cancelled
when the scan resume is OFF).
When tuning step is more than 5 kHz:
The scan pauses on each step when the scan
resume is ON; not applicable when the scan
resume is OFF.
For memory scan:
Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume
is ON; not applicable when the scan resume is OFF.
Scan starts with squelch closed
Scan stops when a signal is detected.
•If the scan resume is set to ON in scan set mode, the
scan pauses for 10 seconds when detecting a signal, then
resumes. When a signal disappears while scan is paused,
scan resumes 2 seconds later.
9-3
Voice squelch control function
This function is useful when you don’t want unmodu-
lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the
voice squelch control function is activated, the trans-
ceiver checks received signals for voice components.
If a received signal includes voice components, and
the tone of the voice components changes within 1
second, scan pauses (or stops). If the received signal
includes no voice components or the tone of the voice
components does not change within 1 second, scan
resumes.
While a phone mode (SSB, AM or FM) is se-
lected,push[VSC](MF7)toswitchtheVSC(Voice
Squelch Control) function ON and OFF.
•“VSC”appearswhenthefunctionisactivated.
•TheVSCfunctionactivatesforanyscan.
•TheVSCfunctionresumesthescanonunmodu-
lated signals, regardless of whether the scan
resume condition is set to ON or OFF.
Scan set mode
When the squelch is open, scan continues until it is
stopped manually— it does not pause on detected
signals. When squelch is closed, scan stops when de-
tecting a signal, then resumes according to the scan
resume condition. Scan speed and the scan resume
condition can be set using the scan set mode.
q Push [SCAN] F-5 to select scan screen.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select scan set mode.
e
Push [Y]
F-1
or [Z]
F-2
to select the desired item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the default
setting.
t Push EXIT/SET to return to scan menu.
Select the desired scan speed from high and low.
Main dial
F-4
DEF
F-1
F-2
EXIT/SET
VSC
9
SCANS
Scan Speed
HIGH
•HIGH :scanisfaster
•LOW :scanisslower
Scan Resume
ON
Set the scan resume function ON or OFF. •ON :Whendetectingasignal,scanpausesfor10
seconds, then resumes. When a signal dis-
appears, scan resumes 2 seconds later.
•OFF:Whendetectingasignal,cancelsscanning.
9-4
Programmed scan operation
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wSelectVFOmode.
e Select the desired operating mode.
•Theoperatingmodecanalsobechangedwhilescan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
t Set [SQL] open or closed.
•Seepage9-2forsquelchcondition.
y Push [PROG] F-1 to start the programmed scan.
•
PROGRAM SCAN
and decimal points blink while
scanning.
u When the scan detects a signal, scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status.
i To cancel the scan, push [PROG] F-1 .
•Rotatingthemaindialalsocancelsthescan.
o Hold down [RECALL] F-6 for 1 second to recall
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired.
If the same frequencies are programmed into
the scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-
grammed scan will not start.
F scan operation
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
wSelectVFOmodeoramemorychannel.
e Select the desired operating mode.
•Theoperatingmodecanalsobechangedwhilescan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
t Set the main band’s [SQL] open or closed.
•Seepage9-2forsquelchcondition.
y Set the F span by pushing [F SPAN] F-4 .
•±5kHz,±10kHz,±20kHz,±50kHz,±100kHz,±500
kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.
u Set center frequency of the F span.
i Push [F] F-2 to start the F scan.
•
:F SCAN
and decimal points blink while scanning.
o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status.
!0 To cancel the scan, push [F] F-2 .
•Rotatingthemaindialalsocancelsthescan.
!1 Hold down [RECALL] F-6 for 1 second to recall
the frequency that was set before starting the scan.
[SQL] Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-1
PROG
[SQL] Main dial
F-2
F
F-4
F SCAN EXIT/SET
9SCANS
9-5
Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan
In fine scan (programmed or F), the scan speed de-
creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver
keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from
50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
e Set for programmed scan or F scan as described
on previous page.
r Push [PROG] F-1 or [F] F-2 to start a scan.
“
PROGRAM SCAN
or
:F SCAN
and decimal
points blink while scanning.
t Push [FINE] F-3 to start a fine scan.
“
FINE PROGRAM SCAN
or
FINE :F SCAN
blinks in-
stead of “
PROGRAM SCAN
or
:F SCAN
, respec-
tively.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed
decreases but scan does not stop.
u Push [PROG] F-1 or [F] F-2 to stop the scan;
push [FINE] F-3 to cancel the fine scan.
•Rotatingthemaindialalsocancelsthescan.
i Hold down [RECALL] F-6 for 1 second to recall
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired.
F-2
F
F-3
FINE
F-1
PROG EXIT/SET
9
SCANS
9-6
Memory scan operation
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
r Set [SQL] open or closed.
•Seepage9-2forsquelchcondition.
t Push [MEMO] F-1 to start the memory scan.
•
MEMORY SCAN
and decimal points blink while scan-
ning.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] F-1 .
•Rotatingthemaindialalsocancelsthescan.
2 or more memory channels must be programmed
for memory scan to start.
Select memory scan operation
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
r Set [SQL] open or closed.
•Seepage9-2forsquelchcondition.
t Push [SEL No.] F-5 several times to select the
select scan number from 1, 2, 3 and 1,2,3.
y Push [MEMO] F-1 to start the memory scan.
•
MEMORY SCAN
and decimal points blink while scan-
ning.
u Push [SELECT] F-3 to start select memory scan;
push [SELECT] F-3 again to return to memory
scan, if desired.
•
SELECT MEMORY SCAN
b l i n k s i n s t e a d o f
MEMORY SCAN
during select memory scan.
i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] F-1 .
•Rotatingthemaindialalsocancelsthescan.
2 or more memory channels must be designated
as select memory channels, as well as the same
select scan channel number, for select memory
scan to start.
[SQL] Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-1
MEMO
F-3
SELECT
F-5
SEL No.
[SQL] Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-1
MEMO
9SCANS
9-7
Setting select memory channels
D Setting in scan screen
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] F-5 to select the scan screen.
r Select the desired memory channel to set as a se-
lect memory channel.
• / keys and direct keypad selections can be
used.
t
Push [SELECT]
F-3
several times to set the mem-
ory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.
y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitthescanscreen.
D Setting in memory list screen
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] F-4 to select memory list
screen.
e Rotate the main dial while pushing [ROLL] F-1 or
[SET] F-2 to select the desired memory channel.
• / keys and direct keypad selections can be
used.
r
Push [SELECT]
F-3
several times to set the mem-
ory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.
t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel.
y Push EXIT/SET toexitthememorylistscreen.
D Erasing the select scan setting
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] F-4 to select memory list
screen, or push [SCAN] F-5 to select scan
screen.
e Hold down [SELECT] F-3 for 1 second to display
memory select all clear window.
r Push one of the following keys to clear all select
scan setting.
[1] F-1 : Clears all 1 setting.
[2] F-2 : Clears all 2 setting.
[3] F-3 : Clears all 3 setting.
[1,2,3] F-4 : Clears all select setting.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitthememorylistscreen.
9
SCANS
9-8
Tone scan
The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a
received signal. By monitoring a signal that is being
transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can
determine the tone frequency required to access the
repeater.
q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to
be checked for a tone frequency.
w Push AM/FM several times to select FM mode.
e Hold down [TONE] (MF6) for 1 second to enter tone
frequency screen.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to check the repeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-
tively.
t Push [T-SCAN] F-6 to start the tone scan.
•“SCAN”blinkswhilescanning.
y When a matching tone frequency is detected, the
tone scan pauses.
Thetonefrequencyissettemporarilyonamemory
channel. Program the memory channel to store the
tone frequency permanently.
•Thedecodedtonefrequencyisusedfortherepeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.
u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN] F-6 .
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the default
frequency.
i Push EXIT/SET toexittonefrequencyscreen.
EXIT/SET
F-1
F-2
F-4 F-6
T-SCAN
DEF
TONE
9SCANS
10-1
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 10
Antenna connection and selection ................................................. 10-2
Antenna memory settings ............................................................... 10-3
D Antenna type selection ............................................................... 10-3
D Temporary memory .................................................................... 10-4
D Antenna selection mode ............................................................. 10-4
D Receive antenna I/O setting ....................................................... 10-5
Antenna tuner operation ................................................................. 10-6
D Tuner operation ........................................................................... 10-6
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna .......................................... 10-7
10-2
Antenna connection and selection
The IC-7700 has 4 antenna connectors for the HF/50
MHz bands, [ANT1], [ANT2], [ANT3], and [ANT4].
For each operating band the IC-7700 covers, there
is a band memory which memorizes the selected
antenna. When you change the operating frequency
outside of a band, the previously used antenna is
automatically selected (see below) for the new band.
This function allows automatic switching of 4 separate
antennas for HF and 50 MHz bands operation.
• Antenna selection mode:“Auto”
After an antenna has been selected for use (by push-
ing [ANT] (MF1)), the antenna is automatically se-
lected whenever that band is used.
[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT1], a 21/28 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT2],
a 50 MHz antenna is connected to [ANT3]. When the
antenna selector function is set to “Auto,an antenna
is automatically selected when changing bands.
A receive-only antenna can be specified for [ANT4].
• Antenna selection mode:“Manual”
When “Manual” is selected, you can use the all
antenna connectors, [ANT1] [ANT2], [ANT3] and
[ANT4], however, band memory does not function. In
this case you must select an antenna manually.
• Antenna selection mode:“OFF”
In this case, only [ANT1] antenna connector can be
used. [ANT] (MF1) switch does not function.
ANT
ANT 1
ANT 2ANT 3
ANT 4
3.5/7 MHz
bands
21/28 MHz
bands
50 MHz
band
RX
only
ANT
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
10-3
Antenna memory settings
This function stores the antenna connector number
for each frequency band.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function
screen, if necessary.
w Hold down [ANT] (MF1) for 1 second to select an-
tenna set screen.
e Select the desired frequency band with a band key.
r Push [ANT] (MF1) several times to select the de-
sired antenna number that you want to set for the
selected frequency band.
•“” appears.
t Hold down [ANT MW] F-3 for 1 second to store
the antenna selection into the antenna memory.
•“” disappears.
y Repeat the steps e to t to store the antenna se-
lection for another frequency bands, if desired.
u Push EXIT/SET toexitantennasetscreen.
D Antenna type selection
When no antenna is connected to [ANT2], [ANT3],
and/or [ANT4], these antenna connectors can be de-
activated deleting the antenna number from the
available selections. This prevents the transceiver
from accidentally transmitting into an unused antenna
connector. In addition, a receive-only antenna can be
specified for [ANT4].
q Select the antenna set screen as described above.
w Push [ANT TYPE] F-7 to select antenna type set
screen.
e Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
antenna.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired antenna
condition from TX/RX, RX (ANT4 only) and OFF.
•TX/RX :Selectwhenanantennaisconnected.
•OFF :Selectwhennoantennaisconnected.
•RX :Selectwhenareceiveonlyantennais
connected. (available for the [ANT4] only)
t Push EXIT/SET toexitantennatypesetscreen.
For your information
The “OFF” antennas cannot be selected with [ANT]
(MF1) switch operation, or with the antenna memory
setting.
When “RX” is selected for [ANT4], “1/R, “2/R” and
“3/R” selections will be added for the selection for
both [ANT] (MF1) switch operation and the antenna
memory setting. In these selections, the antenna con-
nected to [ANT1], [ANT2] and/or [ANT3] will be used
for transmission and the antenna connected to [ANT4]
will be used for reception.
Band keys
ANT
F-3
ANT MW
F-1
F-2
F-7
ANT TYPE
10
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Antenna memory settings (continued)
D Temporary memory
The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man-
ually selected antenna. The selected antenna will be
re-called even if frequency band has been changed.
q Select the antenna set screen.
w Push [TEMP-M] F-4 to turn the temporary mem-
ory ON or OFF.
e Select the desired frequency band with a band key.
r Push [ANT] (MF1) to select the desired antenna.
•appears when a different antenna from the original
is selected.
t
Push [ANT MR]
F-2
to re-call the original antenna.
•“” disappears.
y Push EXIT/SET toexitantennasetscreen.
CAUTION: Before transmitting with the manually
selected antenna, make sure the selected antenna
is suitable for the operating frequency. Otherwise
the transceiver may be damaged.
D Antenna selection mode
The automatic antenna selection (antenna memory)
and the [ANT] (MF1) switch function can be deacti-
vated if desired.
q Select the antenna set screen.
w Push [[ANT] SW] F-6 to select the antenna selec-
tion from Auto, OFF and Manual.
•Auto :Usetheantennamemory.Antennase-
lection with [ANT] switch is also available.
OFF :Onlytheantennaconnectedto[ANT1]
can be used. [ANT] switch is deactivated.
Manual:Deactivatetheantennamemoryfunc-
tion. Antenna can be selected with [ANT]
switch operation only.
e Push EXIT/SET toexitantennasetscreen.
10-4
Push to select the
antenna selection mode.
F-6
[ANT] SW
indicators appear when a different
antenna from the original is selected.
F-4
TEMP-M to turn thePush
temporary memory ON or OFF.
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
10-5
10
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
D Receive antenna I/O setting
In the default setting, receive antenna connectors,
[RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT], on the rear panel
are deactivated and are connected internally by the
switchingrelay.Ifyouwanttoconnectanexternal
preamp or low-pass filter between the [RX ANT-IN]
and [RX ANT-OUT], you must activate them as de-
scribed below.
q Select the antenna set screen.
w Select the desired frequency band with a band key.
e Push [RX-I/O] F-1 to activate the receive antenna
connectors ([RX ANT-IN] and [RX ANT-OUT]).
•“RX-I/O”indicatorsappearwhen[RXANT-IN]and[RX-
ANT-OUT] are active.
r Repeat steps w and e, if desired.
t Push EXIT/SET toexitantennasetscreen.
“RX-I/O” indicators appear when [RX ANT-IN]
and [RX ANT-OUT] are active.
Band keys
F-1
RX-I/O
Preamp or
Low-pass filter,
etc.
Transceiver
Receiver
Transmitter
IN
[RX ANT]
OUT
Transmit/Receive
switching circuit
ANT
10-6
10 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Antenna tuner operation
The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the
transceiver to the connected antenna automatically.
After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-
pacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for
each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore,
when you change the frequency range, the variable
capacitors are automatically preset to the memorized
setting.
CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON
when no antenna is connected. This will damage
the transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.
D Tuner operation
Push TUNER to turn the internal antenna tuner
ON. The antenna is tuned automatically when the
antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.
•WhenthetunerisON,[TUNER]switchindicatorlights
green.
•Whiletuning,[TUNER]switchindicatorblinksgreen.
• MANUAL TUNING
During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal
tuner may not automatically tune correctly. In such
cases, manual tuning is helpful.
Hold down TUNER for 1 second, to start manual
tuning.
•Asidetoneisemittedand[TUNER]switchindicator
blinks red while tuning.
•IfthetunercannotreducetheSWRtolessthan1.5:1
after 20 seconds of tuning, the [TUNER] switch indica-
tor goes out.
• AUTOMATIC TUNER START (HF bands only)
If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of
VSWR1.5:1orless,usetheautotunerstartfunction
and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the
tunerautomaticallywhentheSWRexceeds1.5:1.
This function is controlled in set mode. (p. 12-13).
TUNER
NOTES:
•NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-
nected to antenna port in use.
•When2ormoreantennasareconnected,select
the antenna to be used with [ANT].
•IftheSWRishigherthanabout1.5:1whentuning
farther than 100 kHz from an antenna’s pro-
grammed preset point, hold down TUNER for 1
second to start manual tuning.
•TheinternaltunermaynotbeabletotuneinAM
mode. In such cases, hold down TUNER for
1 second to manually tune.
10-7
10
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Antenna tuner operation (continued)
• PTT TUNER START
The tuner is always re-tuned when the PTT is pushed
after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from
last-tuned frequency). This function replaces the “hold
down TUNER operation and activates for the first
transmission on a new frequency.
This function is controlled in set mode. (p. 12-14).
• Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1
Whenusinganexternalantennatunersuchasthe
IC-PW1’stuner,tunewiththeexternalantennatuner,
and turn OFF the IC-7700’s tuner. After tuning is com-
pleted, turn the internal tuner ON. Otherwise, both
tuners tune simultaneously and correct tuning may
not be obtained.
See the instruction manual included with each an-
tenna tuner for their respective operations.
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna
Check the following and try again:
•the[ANT]connectorselection.
•theantennaconnectionandfeedline.
•theuntunedantennaSWR.(Less than 3:1 for HF bands; Less
than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)
•thetransmitpower.(8 W for HF bands; 15 W for 50 MHz band)
•thepowersourcevoltage/capacity.
If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1
after checking the above, perform the following:
•repeatmanualtuningseveraltimes.
•tunewitha50Ω dummy load and re-tune the antenna.
•turnpowerOFFandON.
•adjusttheantennafeedlinelength.
(This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases.)
•Someantennas,especiallyforthelowbands,haveanar-
row bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned beyond
the edge of their operating bandwidth, therefore, tune
such an antenna as follows:
[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an
SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1
at 3.8 MHz.
q Push TUNER to turn the antenna tuner ON.
w Select CW mode.
e Turn OFF the break-in function. (p. 6-3)
r Push TRANSMIT to set to the transmit condition.
t Set 3.55 MHz and key down.
y Set 3.80 MHz and key down.
u Push TRANSMIT to return to the receive condition.
11-1
CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 11
Time set mode ................................................................................ 11-2
Daily timer setting ........................................................................... 11-3
Setting sleep timer .......................................................................... 11-4
Timer operation .............................................................................. 11-4
11-2
Time set mode
The IC-7700 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock
(accuracy ±75 seconds per month) with daily power
ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer
functions, set the current date and time.
q Push EXIT/SET to close multi-function screen, if
necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [TIME] F-4 to select time set mode.
r
Push [Y]
F-1
or [Z]
F-2
to select the desired item.
t Rotate the main dial to set or select the desired
value or condition.
y Push EXIT/SET toexittimesetmode.
Main dial
EXIT/SET
//
/
F-3
Ω ≈
F-5
EDIT SET
123 Symbol ABC abc
F-1
F-2
F-4
DEF
11 CLOCK AND TIMERS
Date
2000
1
1 ( Sat )
Sets the date. z
Push [
t
u
]
F-3
to select between the year and
the month/day, then rotate the main dial to select
them.
•Thedatesettingand“DATE-setPush[SET]”indica-
tors blink.
x Push [SET] F-5 to set the date.
Time (Now)
1:23
Sets the local time. z Rotate the main dial to set the local time.
•Thetimesettingand“TIME-setPush[SET]”indica-
tors blink.
x Push [SET] F-5 to set the time.
CLOCK2 Function
ON
Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF.
CLOCK2 is convenient to display UTC or other
country’s local time, etc.
ON:TheCLOCK2indicatorisdisplayedbelow
the local time display.
•OFF:TheCLOCK2indicatordoesnotdisplay.
CLOCK2 Offset
0:00
Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-
play within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 minute steps.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the default
value.
CLOCK2 Name
UTC
Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some sym-
bols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ` ^ + – / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } |
_ ~ @) and spaces can be used.
z
Push [EDIT]
F-5
to select the name edit condi-
tion.
•Thecursorunderthe1stcharacterblinks.
x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the
character group, then rotate the main dial to se-
lect the character.
•Push[ABC]or[abc]totogglecapitalandsmalllet-
ters.
•Push[123]or[Symbol]totogglenumeralsandsym-
bols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
•Push[SPACE] F-4 to input a space.
•Pushingthetransceiver’skeypad,[0]–[9],canalso
enter numerals.
c Push EXIT/SET to set the name.
11-3
Daily timer setting
The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified
frequency settings.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close multi-function
screen, if necessary.
w Hold down TIMER for 1 second to select timer set
screen.
e Push one of [TIMER1] F-1 to [TIMER5] F-5 to
select the desired timer.
r Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON
or OFF.
t Push [u] F-2 to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired day of the week.
Select“–––”nottospecifythedayoftheweek.The
timer will function every day in this case.
•Onceadayoftheweekisselected,push[CLR] F-4 to
select “– – –.
y Push [u] F-2 to select the “REPEAT” cell, then
rotate the main dial to select the repeat function
ON or OFF.
•ON :Thetimerfunctions everyselectedday of the
week. (repeats)
•OFF:Thetimerdoesnotrepeat.
u Push [u] F-2 to select the “ON” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power
ON time.
•WhenusingpowerOFFtimeronly,push[CLR] F-4 to
select “– –. This setting cannot be set when the
power OFF timer is set to “– – –.
i Push [u] F-2 to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power
OFF time.
•WhenusingpowerONtimeronly,push[CLR] F-4 to
select “– –. This setting cannot be set when the
power ON timer is set to “– – –.
o Push [u] F-2 to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired memory channel
number.
IfusingthecurrentlysetVFOcondition,push[CLR]
F-4 to select “– – –.
!0 Push [SET] F-7 to set the timer.
•Thetimerindicatorabove TIMER switch lights green.
!1 Repeat steps e to !0 to set other timers, if desired.
!2 Push EXIT/SET toexittimersetscreen.
Main dial
F-2
TIMER2
F-3
TIMER3
TIMER4
EXIT/SET
//
F-1
TIMER1 /
F-4
TIMER5
F-5 F-7
SETCLR
TIMER
11
CLOCK AND TIMERS
11-4
Setting sleep timer
The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au-
tomatically after passing the set period. The timer can
be set to 5–120 minutes in 5 minute steps.
The sleep timer function counts the ‘minute’ units,
anddoesnotcountthe‘second’units.Forexample,
when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59, first one
minutepastforjust1second.Themaximumerroris
therefore 59 seconds. This is normal, not a malfunc-
tion.
Main dial
SLEEP
EXIT/SET
/
F-4 F-7
SETCLR
TIMER
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Hold down TIMER for 1 second to select timer set
screen.
e Push [SLEEP] F-7 to select the sleep timer set
condition.
•“–––”blinks.
r Set the desired time period using the main dial.
•“TIMER–setPush[SET]”blinks.
•Push[CLR] F-4 to select “– – –” to cancel the setting.
t Push [SET] F-7 to set the time.
•Push EXIT/SET to cancel the setting.
•Thetimerindicatorabove TIMER switch lights green.
y Push EXIT/SET toexittimersetscreen.
u The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF
after the sleep timer period elapses.
•Thetimerindicatorblinkswhilebeeping.
•Push TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if
desired.
Timer operation
POWER
TIMER
q Preset the daily timer as described previously.
w Push TIMER momentarily to turn the timer func-
tion ON.
•Thetimerindicatorabovethisswitchlightsgreenwhen
the timer function is ON.
e Hold down POWER for 1 second to turn the power
OFF.
•Thetimerindicatorlightscontinuously.
r When the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON.
t The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF
after the power-off period elapses.
•Thetimerindicatorblinkswhilebeeping.
•Push TIMER momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if
desired.
Timer action in the timer set screen must be se-
lected ON to enable timer operation, described in
page 11-3 steps r.
11 CLOCK AND TIMERS
12-1
SET MODE Section 12
Set mode description ...................................................................... 12-2
D Set mode operation .................................................................... 12-2
D Screen arrangement ................................................................... 12-3
Level set mode ............................................................................... 12-4
ACC set mode ................................................................................ 12-7
Display set mode .......................................................................... 12-10
Others set mode ........................................................................... 12-12
USB-Memory set menu ................................................................ 12-23
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement ..................................... 12-23
D Save option set mode ............................................................... 12-24
D Load option set mode ............................................................... 12-25
File saving .................................................................................... 12-26
File loading ................................................................................... 12-27
Changing a file name ................................................................... 12-28
Deleting a file ................................................................................ 12-29
Unmounting USB flash drive ........................................................ 12-29
Formatting USB flash drive .......................................................... 12-30
12-2
Set mode description
Set mode is used for programming infrequently
changed values or conditions of functions. The
IC-7700 has a level set mode, display set mode, time
set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and
USB-Memory set menu.
D Set mode operation
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
•Holdingdown EXIT/SET for 1 second also selects set
mode menu screen.
ePush[LEVEL] F-1 , [ACC] F-2 , [DISP] F-3 ,
[TIME] F-4 , [OTHERS] F-5 or [USB] F-7 to
enter the desired set mode.
r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode,
push [WIDE] F-7 to toggle wide and normal
screen.
t Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the desired
item, then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the
desired value or condition.
•Pushing[t u] F-3 operation may be necessary for
some items.
y Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitsetmode.
Main dial
F-1
LEVEL
F-2
ACC
F-5
OTHERS EXIT/SET
F-3
DISP
F-4
TIME
F-7
USB
12 SET MODE
12-3
12
SET MODE
D Screen arrangement
• Set mode menu screen (p. 12-2)
• Level set mode (p. 12-4)
• ACC set mode (p. 12-7)
Time set mode (p. 11-2)
• Display set mode (p. 12-10)
• Others set mode (p. 12-12)
• USB-Memory set menu (p. 12-23)
F-1 F-2 F-3
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-7F-2
F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
12-4
12 SET MODE
Level set mode
SSB RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in SSB mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.
Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in AM mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.
Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in FM mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.
Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
12-5
12
SET MODE
CW RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in CW mode. (default: OFF)
RTTY RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in RTTY mode. (default: OFF)
PSK RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 Hz to 2000 Hz) and
low-pass filter (500 Hz to 2400) of the receive audio
in 100 Hz steps in PSK mode. (default: OFF)
SSB TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in
SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
Level set mode (continued)
12-6
12 SET MODE
SSB TBW (WIDE)
100 – 2900
Sets the transmission passband width to a wide
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz
Higher freq. : 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (de-
fault)
SSB TBW (MID)
300 – 2700
Sets the transmission passband width to a middle
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz
Higher freq. : 2500, 2700 (default), 2800 and 2900
Hz
SSB TBW (NAR)
500 – 2500
Sets the transmission passband width to a narrow
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)
Higher freq. : 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900
Hz
Speech Level
50%
Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
Side Tone Level
50%
Sets the side tone output level from 0 to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
Side Tone Level Limit
ON
Turns the side tone output level limiting capability
ON or OFF. (default: ON)
APF AF Level
0dB
Sets the audio level that the audio peak filter is ON
in the CW mode, from 0 to +6 dB in 1dB step.
(default: 0dB)
Beep Level
50%
Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0 to 100%
in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
Beep Level Limit
ON
Turns the key-touch beep output level limiting capa-
bility ON or OFF. (default: ON)
Phones Level Ratio
1.00
Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head-
phone toward to the internal speaker within a range
of 0.60 to 1.40 in 0.01 steps. (default: 1.00)
Level set mode (continued)
12-7
12
SET MODE
ACC set mode
ACC AF Output Level
50%
Sets the desired audio output level, output from
[ACC1], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.
•Outputsapproximately200mVat50%(default)setting.
S/PDIF Output Level
100%
Sets the desired output level of [S/P DIF], within 0 to
100% in 1% steps. (default: 100%)
ACC MOD Level
50%
Sets the desired audio input level for modulation
from [ACC1].
•Approximately100mVat50%(default)setting.
S/PDIF MOD Level
50%
Sets the desired input level for modulation from [S/P
DIF], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.
(default: 50%)
LAN MOD Level
50%
Sets the desired input level for modulation from
[LAN], within 0 to 100% in 1% steps.
(default: 50%)
DATA OFF MOD
MIC,ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data mode is not in use.
•MIC :Usethesignalsfrom[MIC].
•ACC :Usethesignalsfrom[ACC1](pin4).
•MIC,ACC :Use t he si gn al s f ro m [MI C] a nd
[ACC1] (pin 4). (default)
•S/PDIF :Usethesignalsfrom[S/PDIF].
•LAN :Usethesignalsfrom[LAN].
DATA1 MOD
ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 1 mode (D1) is in use.
•MIC :Usethesignalsfrom[MIC].
•ACC :Usethesignalsfrom[ACC1](pin4).
(default)
•MIC,ACC :Use t he si gn al s f ro m [MI C] a nd
[ACC1] (pin 4).
•S/PDIF :Usethesignalsfrom[S/PDIF].
•LAN :Usethesignalsfrom[LAN].
12-8
12 SET MODE
DATA2 MOD
MIC,ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 2 mode (D2) is in use.
•MIC :Usethesignalsfrom[MIC].
•ACC :Usethesignalsfrom[ACC1](pin4).
•MIC,ACC :Use t he si gn al s f ro m [MI C] a n d
[ACC1] (pin 4). (default)
•S/PDIF :Usethesignalsfrom[S/PDIF].
•LAN :Usethesignalsfrom[LAN].
DATA3 MOD
MIC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 3 mode (D3) is in use.
•MIC :Usethesignalsfrom[MIC].(default)
•ACC :Usethesignalsfrom[ACC1](pin4).
•MIC,ACC :Use t he si gn al s f ro m [MI C] a n d
[ACC1] (pin 4).
•S/PDIF :Usethesignalsfrom[S/PDIF].
•LAN :Usethesignalsfrom[LAN].
SEND Relay Type
Lead
Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from
Lead and MOSFET.
Select the suitable relay type when connecting a
non-Icom linear amplifier.
•Lead :Usemechanicalrelay.
(16VDC/0.5Amaximum:default)
•MOS-FET:Usesemiconductortyperelay.(250
V/200mAmaximum)
External Meter Output
Auto
Selectsthedesireditemforanexternalmeterindi-
cation.
Auto :Outputsthereceivingsignalstrength
level during receive, and outputs the
selected level (selected with [METER]),
during transmit. (default)
S :Outputsthereceivingsignalstrength
level during receive.
•Po :Outputsthetransmittingpowerleveldur-
ing transmit.
•SWR :OutputstheVSWRlevelduringtransmit.
•ALC :OutputstheALClevelduringtransmit.
COMP :Outputsthecompressionlevelduring
transmit.
•Vd : Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the
final amplifier MOSFETs.
•Id : Outputs the drain current of the final am-
plifier MOSFETs.
External Meter Level
50%
Setstheoutputlevelforanexternalmeterindication
within 0 to 100% range in 1% steps.
•Approximately2.5Vat50%(default)settingforfull-scale
indication. (4.7 kΩ impedance)
ACC set mode (continued)
12-9
12
SET MODE
REF IN/OUT
OFF
Selects the transceiver’s reference signal condition
from IN, OFF and OUT.
•IN :UseanexternalreferencesignalfortheIC-
7700. Turn the transceiver power OFF then
ON to make the setting effective.
•OFF :Notinput/outputthereferencesignal.
(default)
OUT :OutputstheIC-7700referencesignalto
externallyconnectedequipment(s)fortheir
reference.
NOTE: If the applied reference signal is off-fre-
quency, or no signal is applied with “IN” selection,
the IC-7700 will not work properly. Select “OFF” or
“OUT” then reboot the IC-7700 in such case.
REF Adjust
50%
Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency
within 0 to 100% range in 1% steps during frequency
calibration.
NOTE: Default setting is different for each trans-
ceiver.
ACC set mode (continued)
12-10
12 SET MODE
LCD Unit Bright
50%
Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0 (dark) to
100% (bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
Backlight (Switches)
80
Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1
(dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80)
Display Type
A
Selects the desired display type from A (Black back)
and B (Blue back). (default: A)
See page13-4 for details.
Display Font
Basic (1)
Selects the desired font for frequency readout from
Basic (1), Basic (2), Italic, Round and Slim.
(default: Basic (1))
See page13-4 for details.
Meter Response
MID
Set meter needle response between SLOW, MID
and FAST. (default: MID)
This setting is effective for the standard and edge-
wise meter type selections only.
Meter Type (Normal Screen)
Standard
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide
screen or mini scope display from Edgewise and
Bar. (default: Bar)
Meter Type (Wide Screen)
Bar
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide
screen or mini scope display from Edgewise and
Bar. (default: Bar)
Meter Peak Hold (Bar)
ON
Turns the meter peak hold function ON or OFF.
(default: ON)
This function is used for the bar meter only.
Memory Name
ON
Sets the memory name display, during memory
mode operation, ON or OFF. (default: ON)
•ON :Theprogrammedmemorynameisdisplayed
above the frequency display.
•OFF:Nomemorynameisdisplayedevenamem-
ory name is programmed.
APF–Width Popup (APF OFF ON)
ON
Enables the pop-up display capability for the APF
filter width when the APF filter is turned ON.
(default: ON)
Display set mode
12-11
12
SET MODE
MN–Q Popup (MN OFF ON)
ON
Enables the pop-up display capability for the notch
filter width when the manual notch filter is turned
ON. (default: ON)
Screen Saver Function
60min
Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60
minutes) and OFF. (default: 60 minutes)
The screen saver will activate when no operation is
performed for the selected time period to protect the
LCD from the “burn-in” effect.
Screen Saver Type
Bound
Selects the screen saver type from Bound, Rota-
tion” and “Twist. (default: Bound)
The screen saver pattern can be displayed for your
referencewhileholdingdown[PREVIEW]
F-5
.
External Display
OFF
Select“ON”whentheexternaldisplayisconnected.
(default: OFF)
•Atleast800×600pixelresolutionisrequiredforthedis-
play.
External Display Sync Pulse
H
Selectsthesuitablepulselevelfortheconnectedex-
ternal display from H and L. (default: H)
Opening Message
ON
Turns the opening message screen display capabil-
ity ON or OFF. (default: ON)
My Call
Setstheintroductorytext,upto10-characterlong,
displayed in the opening screen.
Usually, you set your call sign for the opening
screen.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some sym-
bols (– / . @) and spaces can be used.
z
Push [EDIT]
F-5
to select the name edit condi-
tion.
•Thecursorunderthe1stcharacterblinks.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then
rotate the main dial to select the character.
•Push[ABC](MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and
small letters.
•Push[123](MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numer-
als and symbols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
•Push[SPACE] F-4 to input a space.
•Pushingthetransceiver’skeypad,[0]–[9],canalso
enter numerals.
c Push EXIT/SET to set the name.
Display set mode (continued)
12-12
12 SET MODE
Calibration Marker
OFF
This item is used for a simple frequency check of the
transceiver. (default: OFF)
See page 13-5 for calibration procedure.
NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after check-
ing the frequency of the transceiver.
Beep (Confirmation)
ON
A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to
confirm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent
operation. (default: ON)
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 12-6)
Beep (Band Edge)
ON (Default)
When you tune into or out of an amateur band’s fre-
quency range, a beep sounds. This functions inde-
pendently of the confirmation beep setting (above).
A different beep tone sounds when you tune in or
out of an amateur band’s frequency range. A reg-
ular beep sounds when you tune into a band, and
an lower tone error beep will sound when you
tune out of a band.
The beep output level can be set in the level set
mode. (p. 12-6)
W
hen “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is se-
lected, [BAND] appears in the display above the func-
tion switch
F-5
. Up to 30 band edge frequencies
can be programmed in the band edge screen.
See page 3-14 for programming details.
•OFF :BandedgebeepisOFF.
•ON(Default) :Whenyoutuneintooroutofthe
default amateur band’s frequency
range, a beep sounds. (default)
•ON(User) :Whenyoutuneoutsideof,orback
into a user programmed amateur
band’s frequency range, a beep
sounds.
•ON(User)&TXLimit
: When you tune outside of, or back
into a user programmed amateur
band’s frequency range, a beep
sounds. Transmission is also inhib-
ited outside the programmed band.
Beep Sound
1000Hz
Sets the desired key-touch beep frequency within
500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)
TX Delay (HF)
OFF
Sets the transmission’s timing for the HF bands.
Whenanexternaldevice,suchasavacuumtubelin-
ear amplifier or a receiver preamplifier, is connected
to the transceiver and you use the SEND line, a prob-
lem could possibly occur. If the device’s transmit/re-
ceive switching time is slower than the time for the
Icom transceiver, the device may not yet ready for
a transmitted signal, and could be damaged by the
transceivers RF power.
Ifnecessarytopreventdamagetotheexternalde-
vice, set an appropriate TX delay.
OFF :The transmission delay is disabled.
(default)
•10to30ms:Aftertransmitoperation,theTXoutput
is delayed for the set period of time
(10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 milliseconds).
Other set mode
12-13
12
SET MODE
TX Delay (50M)
OFF
Sets the transmission’s timing for the 50 MHz band.
See the previous item “TX Delay (HF)” for more de-
tails.
Time–Out Timer (CI–V)
OFF
Turns the Time-Out Timer function ON (3, 5, 10, 20
or 30 minutes) or OFF. If a continuous transmission
exceedstheselectedtimeperiod,thetransmission
will be cut off, to prevent a prolonged transmission.
(default: OFF)
NOTE: This function will be activated only when
youtransmitusingCI-Vcommands,orpushing
TRANSMIT .
Quick SPLIT
ON
When this item is set to ON, holding down SPLIT
for1secondsetstheunselectedVFO’sreadoutfre-
quencytotheselectedVFO’sreadoutfrequencyand
activates split operation.
(default: ON)
See page 6-7 for details.
FM SPLIT Offset(HF)
–0.100MHz
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and
receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is
used to input the repeater offset for an HF band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)
FM SPLIT Offset(50M)
–0.500MHz
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is
used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 MHz to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)
SPLIT LOCK
OFF
When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to
adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]
even while the lock function is activated.
(default: OFF)
See pages 6-6 and 6-7 for split frequency operation
details.
Other set mode (continued)
12-14
12 SET MODE
Tuner (Auto Start)
OFF
The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start
capability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher
than 1.5–3:1.
•OFF:ThetunerremainsOFFevenwhentheSWR
is poor (1.5–3:1). (default)
•ON :Automatictunestartsevenwhenthetuneris
turned OFF during HF bands operation.
Tuner (PTT Start)
OFF
Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started
automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after
the operating frequency is changed (more than 1%
from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF)
Transverter Function
Auto
Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto
and ON. (default: Auto)
•ON :TurnthetransverteroperationON.
•Auto:Thetransceiverturnsintotransverteropera-
tionconditionwhen2to13.8VDCisapplied
to [ACC2] pin 6.
Transverter Offset
16.000MHz (14.000.00 30.000.00)
Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter
operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.
(default: 16.000 MHz)
RTTY Mark Frequency
2125
Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark fre-
quency is switched between 1275, 1615 and 2125
Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)
2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal
RTTY decoder is used.
RTTY Shift Width
170
Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable
values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)
170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal
RTTY decoder is used.
RTTY Keying Polarity
Normal
Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse
keying polarity can be selected. (default: Normal)
When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space
are reversed.
•Normal :Keyopen/close=Mark/Space
•Reverse :Keyopen/close=Space/Mark
PSK Tone Frequency
1500
Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK
reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.
(default: 1500 Hz)
SPEECH Language
English
Selects the speech language from English and Jap-
anese. (default: English)
SPEECH Speed
HIGH
Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and
LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)
Other set mode (continued)
12-15
12
SET MODE
SPEECH S-Level
ON
The IC-7700 speech processor can announce
frequency, mode and signal level. Signal level an-
nouncement can be deactivated if desired.
(default: ON)
When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not an-
nounced.
SPEECH [MODE] Switch
OFF
Selects the operating mode speech capability when
a mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF. (default: OFF)
When “ON” is selected, the selected operating mode
is announced when a mode switch is pushed.
Memopad Numbers
5
Sets the number of memo pad channels available. 5
or 10 memo pads can be selected. (default: 5)
MAIN DIAL Auto TS
HIGH
Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial.
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step
automatically changes several times as selected.
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fast-
est) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)
•HIGH :AutotuningstepisturnedON.Fastest
tuning step during rapid rotation. (default)
•LOW :AutotuningstepisturnedON.Fastertun-
ing step during rapid rotation.
•OFF :AutotuningstepisturnedOFF.
MIC Up/Down Speed
HIGH
Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned
when the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are held
down. HIGH or LOW can be selected.
•HIGH :Highspeed(default:50tuningsteps/sec-
ond)
•LOW :Lowspeed(25tuningsteps/second)
Quick RIT/TX Clear
OFF
Selects the RIT/TX frequency clearing instruction
with the CLEAR switch.
•ON :Cl e a r s th e R I T/ TX frequency when
CLEAR is pushed momentarily.
•OFF:Cle a rs t h e R IT / TX frequency when
CLEAR is held down for 1 second. (default)
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)
Auto/Manual
Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation
from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
•Auto :Onlytheautonotchcanbeused.
•Manual :Onlythemanualnotchcanbeused.
•Auto/Manual:Boththeautoandmanualnotchcan
be used. (default)
[NOTCH] Switch (AM)
Auto/Manual
Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from
Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
•Auto :Onlytheautonotchcanbeused.
•Manual :Onlythemanualnotchcanbeused.
•Auto/Manual:Boththeautoandmanualnotchcan
be used. (default)
DIGI–SEL VR Operation
DIGI–SEL
Selects [DIGI-SEL] control function from DIGI-SEL
and APF.
•DIGI-SEL :[DIGI-SEL]controlfunctionsasthedig-
ital selector operation. (default)
APF :[DIGI-SEL]controlfunctionsasthe
audio peak filter adjustment.
Other set mode (continued)
12-16
12 SET MODE
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning
OFF
Selects the displayed frequency shift function from
ON and OFF. (default: OFF)
When this function is activated, the audio pitch or
tones of the received signal will remain the same
even when the operating mode is changed between
SSB and CW.
The amount of frequency shift may differ accord-
ing to the CW pitch setting.
•ON :Thedisplayedfrequencyshiftswhentheop-
erating mode is changed between SSB and
CW.
•OFF:Thedisplayedfrequencydoesnotshift.
CW Normal Side
LSB
Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW
normal mode. (default: LSB)
APF Type
SOFT
Select audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and
SHARP. (default: SOFT)
•SOFT :Soft filter shape makes distinguishing
noise and signals easier. The audio filter
width is related to the CW pitch setting.
•SHARP :Sharp filtershape rejectsinterfering sig-
nals more aggressively.
External Keypad (VOICE)
OFF
Setstheexternalkeypadforvoicemessagetrans-
mission capability ON or OFF.
Seepage2-7fortheequivalentcircuitofanexternal
keypad and connection.
•ON :Pushingoneofexternalkeypadswitches,
transmits the desired voice message con-
tents during a phone mode operation.
Holding down a switch to repeatedly transmit
the desired memory contents.
•OFF:Externalkeypaddoesnotfunction.(default)
External Keypad (KEYER)
OFF
Setstheexternalkeypadforkeyermemorytrans-
mission capability ON or OFF.
Seepage2-7fortheequivalentcircuitofanexternal
keypad and connection.
•ON :Pushingoneofexternalkeypadswitches,
transmits the desired keyer memory contents
during CW mode operation.
Holding down a switch to repeatedly transmit
the desired memory contents.
•OFF:Externalkeypaddoesnotfunction.(default)
External Keypad (RTTY)
OFF
SetstheexternalkeypadforRTTYmemorytrans-
mission capability ON or OFF.
Only RTTY memory channels RT1, RT2, RT3 and
RT4canbetransmittedusingtheexternalkeypad.
Seepage2-7fortheequivalentcircuitofanexternal
keypad and connection.
•ON :IntheRTTYmode,andwhiletheRTTYde-
codescreenisactive,pushingoneoftheex-
ternal keypad switches transmits the desired
RTTY memory contents.
•OFF:Theexternalkeypaddoesnotfunction.
(default)
Other set mode (continued)
12-17
12
SET MODE
External Keypad (PSK)
OFF
SetstheexternalkeypadforPSKmemorytransmis-
sion capability ON or OFF.
Only PSK memory channels PT1, PT2, PT3 and PT4
canbetransmittedusingtheexternalkeypad.
Seepage2-7fortheequivalentcircuitofanexternal
keypad and connection.
•ON :InthePSKmode,andwhilethePSKdecode
screenisactive,pushingoneoftheexternal
keypad switches transmits the desired PSK
memory contents.
•OFF:Theexternalkeypaddoesnotfunction.
(default)
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (VOICE)
OFF
Sets the voice message transmission capability when
one of the [F1] to [F4] keys of the connected key-
board is pushed, to ON or OFF.
•ON :Pushingoneofthe[F1]to[F4]keystrans-
mits the desired voice message contents
during phone mode operation.
And while holding down the [SHIFT] key,
push the [F1] to [F4] keys to transmit the de-
sired keyer memory contents repeatedly.
•OFF:The[F1]to[F4]keysdonotfunction.
(default)
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (KEYER)
OFF
Sets the keyer memory transmission capability when
one of the [F1] to [F4] keys is pushed, to ON or
OFF.
•ON :Pushingoneofthe[F1]to[F4]keystrans-
mits the desired keyer memory contents dur-
ing CW mode operation.
And while holding down the [SHIFT] key,
push the [F1] to [F4] keys to transmit the de-
sired keyer memory contents repeatedly.
•OFF:The[F1]to[F4]keysdonotfunction.
(default)
Shutdown Function
Shutdown
Selects the shutdown option between Standby/Shut-
down and Shutdown, for turning ON the transceiver
by Remote stations. (default: Shutdown)
When this item is set to “Standby/Shutdown:
z Holding down POWER for 1 second displays the
dialogboxbelow.
x Push POWER to turn OFF the power with the
Standby mode.
•Ifyouwanttoselect“Shutdown,”rotatethemaindial
or push [q] F-2 , then push POWER .
Standby/Shutdown :
You can turn ON the transceiver’s power
usingexternalequipmentsuchasaPC
with RS-BA1.
Shutdown : Only the POWER switch turns ON the
transceiver.
NOTE while in the standby mode:
•Theinternalcoolingfanisactive,thisisnormal;
not malfunction.
CI–V Baud Rate
Auto
SetstheCI-Vdatatransferrate.300,1200,4800,
9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available.
(default: Auto)
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-
cally set according to the data rate of connected
controller.
Other set mode (continued)
12-18
12 SET MODE
CI–V Address
74h
Todistinguishequipment,eachCI-Vtransceiverhas
itsownIcomstandardaddressinhexadecimalcode.
The IC-7700’s address is 74h.
When 2 or more IC-7700’s are connected to an op-
tional CT-17 c i -v level converter, rotate the main
dial to select a different address for each IC-7700;
the range is 01h to DFh.
CI–V Transceive
ON
Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7700
connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers.
When “ON” is selected, changing the frequency,
operating mode, etc. on the IC-7700 automatically
changes those of connected transceivers (or receiv-
ers) and vice versa.
CI–V LANREMOTE Transceive Address
00h
SetstheCI-V addressforsending thetransceive
data from [LAN] to [REMOTE] or [RS-232C]. The
[REMOTE] or [RS-232C] connectors output the trans-
ceive data with this setting Address.
When your system are configured with any other
transceivers or receivers, and you do not want to
change their frequency or operating mode by operat-
ing the RS-BA1, sets this address different with 00h.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this set-
ting.
The IC-PW1
can receive the transceive data from
other than 00h, so you can still operate the IC-PW1
by operating RS-BA1. In that case you must reset the
IC-PW1andsettheCI-Vsettingsagain.SeetheIC-
PW1’s instruction manual for details.
RS–232C Function
CI–V
Select [RS-232C] connector output data format from
CI-VandDecode.
•CI-V :OutputsdatainCI-Vformat.(default)
•Decode :OutputsdecodedcontentsinASCIIcode
format.
Decode Baud Rate
9600
Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when
“Decode” is selected in “RS-232C Function” above;
settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600)
Keyboard Type
English
Selects the connected keyboard type from Japa-
nese, English, United Kingdom, French, French (Ca-
nadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazil-
ian), Spanish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian.
(default: English)
Keyboard Repeat Delay
250ms
Sets the time period for delay from 100 to 1000 mil-
liseconds in 50 millisecond steps. (default: 250 mil-
liseconds)
When a key of the connected keyboard is held down
for the set period, the character is input continuously.
Other set mode (continued)
12-19
12
SET MODE
Keyboard Repeat Rate
10.9cps
Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard
within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)
*cps=character per second
When a key of the connected keyboard is held down,
the character is repeatedly input with the set speed.
•Availablerepeatingrate
2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 5.0,
5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0,
13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7,
30.0
IP Address (Valid after Reboot)
192. 168. 0. 10
Sets IP address for the IC-7700 when connecting to
your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the
Ethernet connector.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective. See page 16-7 for details.
Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot)
255. 255. 255. 0 (24bit)
Sets subnet mask for the IC-7700 when connecting
to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the
Ethernet connector.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective. See page 16-7 for details.
Default Gateway (Valid after Reboot)
. . .
Sets the default gateway of the router that you want
to connect the IC-7700 to.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1 through the Inter-
net, you need this setting.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Network Control (Valid after Reboot)
OFF
Selects the remote control capability ON or OFF.
(default : OFF)
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this set-
ting.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Control Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)
50001
Sets the Control port of the IC-7700 by accessing
from the remote station.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this set-
ting.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Serial Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)
50002
Sets the Serial port of the IC-7700 by accessing from
the remote station.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this set-
ting.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Other set mode (continued)
12-20
12 SET MODE
Audio Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)
50003
Sets the Audio port of the IC-7700 by accessing from
the remote station.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this set-
ting.
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Internet Access Line (Valid after Reboot)
FTTH
Selects the your internet access line type.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1 through the Inter-
net, you need this setting.
•FTTH :FiberToTheHome
•ADSL/CATV:ADSLorCabletelevision
Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
Network User1 ID
Register the Users ID to allow them to remotely ac-
cess the IC-7700. The IC-7700 can register three
users to Network User1 ID to Network User3 ID.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this reg-
istration.
The IC-7700 verifies the User ID and password when
Remote stations attempt to access the transceiver.
If the User ID or password is incorrect, the Remote
station cannot access the transceiver.
z Push [EDIT] F-5 to enter the User ID Edit mode.
x Rotate the main dial to input a User ID of up to 16
characters.
•Push[ABC](MF6)or[abc](MF6)totoggleupperand
lower case letters.
•Push[123](MF7)or[Symbol](MF7)totogglebetween
numerals and symbols.
•YoucannotregisterthesameIDwithUser2orUser3,
if the ID is already registered.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
c Push [SET] F-5 to set.
Password
Register the password for the Network User1 ID.
z Push
[EDIT] F-5
to enter the Password Edit
mode.
x Rotate the main dial to input a Password of 8 to 16
characters, case-sensitive.
•Atleasttwodifferentcharactersmustbeused.
•Push[ABC](MF6)or[abc](MF6)totoggleupperand
lower case letters.
•Push[123](MF7)or[Symbol](MF7)totogglebetween
numerals and symbols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[F-3•DEL]todeletetheselectedcharacter.
c Push [SET] F-5 to set.
Administrator
NO
Selects the administrator setting YES or NO for Net-
work User1 ID. (default: NO)
When this item is set to “YES,” the Remote station
can terminate a connection between another Remote
station and the IC-7700.
Other set mode (continued)
12-21
12
SET MODE
Network User2 ID
Register the Users ID to allow them to remotely ac-
cess the IC-7700. The IC-7700 can register three
users to Network User1 ID to Network User3 ID.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this reg-
istration.
See the Network User1 ID on the previous page for
setting details.
•YoucannotregisterthesameIDwithUser1orUser3,if
the ID is already registered.
Password
Register the password for the Network User2 ID. See the Password of Network User1 ID on the previ-
ous page for setting details.
Administrator
NO
Selects the administrator setting YES or NO for Net-
work User2 ID. (default: NO)
When this item is set to “YES,” the Remote station
can terminate a connection between another Remote
station and the IC-7700.
Network User3 ID
Register the Users ID to allow them to remotely ac-
cess the IC-7700. The IC-7700 can register three
users to Network User1 ID to Network User3 ID.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this reg-
istration.
See the Network User1 ID on the previous page for
setting details.
•YoucannotregisterthesameIDwithUser1orUser2,if
the ID is already registered.
Password
Register the password for the Network User3 ID. See the Password of Network User1 ID on the previ-
ous page for setting details.
Administrator
NO
Selects the administrator setting YES or NO for Net-
work User3 ID. (default: NO)
When this item is set to “YES,” the Remote station
can terminate a connection between another Remote
station and the IC-7700.
Network Radio Name
IC-7700
Enters the Network Radio name of up to 16 charac-
ters. The name displays on an RS-BA1’s Remote
Utility.
DO NOT use the duplicated name on your network.
Only when you configure the remote control sys-
tem using an optional RS-BA1, you need this reg-
istration.
z Push [EDIT] F-5 to enter the Network Radio
Name Edit mode.
x Rotate the main dial to input a Network Radio
Name of up to 16 characters.
•Push[ABC](MF6)or[abc](MF6)totoggleupperand
lower case letters.
•Push[123](MF7)or[Symbol](MF7)totogglebetween
numerals and symbols.
•Push[t] F-1 or [u] F-2 for cursor movement.
•Push[DEL] F-3 to delete the selected character.
c Push [SET] F-5 to set.
Other set mode (continued)
12-22
12 SET MODE
Network AF Sample Rates
8kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz
Selects the limitation of the received audio sampling
rate that Remote stations can adjust.
8 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, 24 kHz and 48 kHz are se-
lectable. (default: 16 kHz)
Higher sampling rates will improve the audio qual-
ity. However, they also increase the amount of data,
which can cause voice delay or jumpiness, depend-
ing on the network condition.
Lower sampling rates will decrease the audio quality.
However, they also decrease the amount of data.
Codecs
LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit
Sets the received audio codecs that Remote stations
can adjust.
LPCM 8 bit, u-law 8 bit and LPCM 16 bit are selecta-
ble. (default: LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit)
Network MOD Use
ON
Selects whether or not to allow Remote stations to
send the modulation audio. (default : ON)
ON: The Remote stations send the modulation
audio.
•OFF:TheRemotestationsdonotsendthemodula-
tion audio.
Sample Rates
8kHz
Selects the limitation of the modulation audio sam-
pling rate that Remote stations can adjust.
8 kHz, 12 kHz, 16 kHz, 24 kHz and 48 kHz are se-
lectable. (default: 8 kHz)
Higher sampling rates will improve the audio quality.
However, they also increase the amount of data,
which can cause voice delay or jumpiness, depend-
ing on the network condition.
Lower sampling rates will decrease the audio quality.
However, they also decrease the amount of data.
Codecs
LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit
Sets the transmit audio codecs that Remote stations
can select.
LPCM 8 bit, u-law 8 bit and LPCM 16 bit are selecta-
ble. (default: LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit)
Other set mode (continued)
12-23
12
SET MODE
USB-Memory set menu
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement
• USB-Memory set menu
• Setting load screen (p. 12-26)
• Load option set mode (p. 12-25)
• Firmware update (p. 16-4)
• Format menu (p. 12-30)
• Setting save screen (p. 12-26)
• Save option set mode (p. 12-24)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-3
F-4
F-2
F-5 F-6 F-7
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7
• Unmount USB flash drive (p. 12-29)
F-5
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-7700 may
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc. (Japan) may be the only way to
fix it.
You undertake the updating of the firmware at your own risk and responsibility.
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.
The USB flash drive is not supplied by Icom.
12-24
12 SET MODE
SAVE Contents
All
Selects file save condition from All and Select.
(default: All)
•All :Savesallthefollowingcontents.
•Select:Savestheselectedcontentsonly.
Memory & Settings
YES
Thissettingisfixed“YES. •YES :Savesmemorychannelcontentsandset-
tings of set modes.
Voice TX Memory
YES
Selects the voice TX message save condition from
YES and NO. (default: YES)
•YES :SavesthevoiceTXmessage.
•NO :Doesnotsave.
Voice RX Memory
NO
Selects the voice RX message save condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO)
•YES :SavesthevoiceRXmessage.
•NO :Doesnotsave.
SAVE Form
Now
Ver
Selects file saving format between NowVer and
OldVer.(default:NowVer)
Previous versions will be retained, and selectable in
OldVer,” and indicated in brackets.
For your information:
The current IC-7700 firmware version number can
be confirmed when turning the power ON and is dis-
played in the bottom right corner of the function dis-
play, as shown below.
2.00
Firmware version number is displayed here
•NowVer :Saves thele in thermware version
format currently being used.
•OldVer :Saves thele in thermware version
format that is indicated in brackets.
D Save option set mode
12-25
12
SET MODE
Load Contents
Select
Selects file load condition from All and Select.
(default: Select)
•All :Loadsandsetstheallfollowingcontents.
•Select:Loadsandsetstheselectedcontentsonly.
ANT Memory
NO
Selects the antenna memory setting loading condi-
tion from YES and NO. (default: NO).
•YES :Loadsandsetstheantennamemory.
•NO :Usetheoriginalantennamemorysetting.
REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust
NO
Selects the reference signal setting load condition
from YES and NO. (default: NO).
YES :Loadsandsetsthereferencesignalset-
ting.
•NO :Usetheoriginalreferencesignalsetting.
Network Settings
NO
Selects the Network settings loading condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO).
•YES :LoadsandsetstheNetworksettings.
•NO :UsetheoriginalNetworksettings.
CI–V Address
NO
SelectstheCI-Vaddresssettingloadconditionfrom
YES and NO. (default: NO).
•YES :LoadsandsetstheCI-Vaddresssetting.
•NO :UsetheoriginalCI-Vaddresssetting.
Other Memory & Settings
YES
Thissettingisfixed“YES. •YES :Loadsandsetsmemorychannelcontents
and other settings.
Voice TX Memory
YES
Selects the voice TX message load condition from
YES and NO. (default: YES).
•YES :LoadsandsetsvoiceTXmessage.
•NO :UsetheoriginalvoiceTXmessage.
Voice RX Memory
NO
Selects the voice RX message load condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO).
•YES :LoadsandsetsvoiceRXmessage.
•NO :UsetheoriginalvoiceRXmessage.
D Load option set mode
12-26
12 SET MODE
File saving
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can
be saved into the USB flash drive for backup.
q
During set mode menu screen display, push
[USB]
F-7
to select USB-Memory set menu screen.
wPush[SAVE] F-2 to select setting save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] F-4 to select file name edit
condition.
•Push[DIR/FILE] F-1 several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
•[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0
to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ – (
) { } _ ~ @ can be selected.
•Push[t] F-1 to move the cursor left, push [u]
F-2 to move the cursor right, push [DEL] F-3
to delete a character and push [SPACE] F-4 to
insert a space.
c Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.
• Save option
z Push [OPTION] F-5 to enter save option
set mode.
x Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select the item,
then rotate the main dial to select the desired
setting. (See page 12-24 for details.)
•“Text”isthedefaultsetting.
•Holddown[DEF] F-4 for 1 second to select the
default setting.
c Push EXIT/SET to return to the previous dis-
play.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB flash drive.
•Push[t u] F-4 to select the upper directory.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select folder in the
same directory.
•Holddown[t u] F-4 for 1 second to select a
folder in the directory.
•Push[REN/DEL] F-5 to rename the folder.
•Holddown[REN/DEL] F-5 for 1 second to de-
lete the folder.
•Holddown[MAKE] F-6 for 1 second to making
a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
nerasthe“•Filename”above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 twice to select the file
name.
rPush[SAVE] F-6 .
•Confirmationscreenappears.
t Push [OK] F-6 to save.
•Aftersavingiscompleted,returntoUSBflashdriveset
menu automatically.
Main dial
DIR/FILE EXIT/SET
F-1
F-7
WIDE CANCEL
F-5
OPTION
F-6
SAVE OK
F-4
EDIT
//
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB]
connector on the front panel, the file name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
12-27
12
SET MODE
File loading
By loading the saved setting file from the USB flash
drive, you can easily set up another IC-7700—several
operators settings can easily be applied to one IC-
7700.
q During set mode menu screen display, push
[USB] F-7 to select USB-Memory set menu
screen.
w Push [LOAD] F-1 to select setting load screen.
TheindicatorabovetheUSBconnectorsand“USB”
indicator on the display blink.
•AftertheUSBflashdrivecontentsaredisplayed,the
indicators stop blinking.
e Push [OPTION] F-5 to select load option set
mode, then set the desired loading conditions, if
desired.
•Seepage12-25fordetails.
r Push [Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select the desired
setting file.
t Push [LOAD] F-4 .
•Confirmationscreenappears.
y Push [OK] F-6 to starts loading.
Aftertheloadingiscompleted,themessagedialog,
“Reboot the IC-7700, appears.
u Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
DIR/FILE
F-1
F-7
WIDE CANCEL
F-5
OPTION
F-6
SORT OK
F-4
LOAD
//
F-2
F-3
EXIT/SET
Changing a file name
The file name, saved in the USB flash drive, can be
re-named from the transceiver as desired.
q During setting save screen display, push
[DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view screen.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select the desired folder.
•“DECODE,“SETTING”and“VOICE”foldersareavail-
able as the default.
•Afterthefolderisselected,holddown[t u] F-4 for 1
second to display content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select file list screen.
e
Push [Y]
F-2
or [Z]
F-3
to select the desired file.
r Push [REN/DEL] F-5 momentarily to select the
file name edit condition.
t Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character.
•[ABC](MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9
(numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ ( ) { } _ ~
@ can be selected.
•Push[t] F-1 to move the cursor left, push [u] F-2 to
move the cursor right, push [DEL] F-3 to delete a
character and push [SPACE] F-4 to insert a space.
Pushingthetransceiver’skeypad,[0]–[9],canalso
enter numerals.
y Push EXIT/SET to set the file name.
DIR/FILE
F-1
F-7
WIDE CANCEL
REN/DEL
F-5
F-4
/
F-2
F-3
EXIT/SET
12-28
12 SET MODE
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB]
connector on the front panel, the file name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
12-29
12
SET MODE
Deleting a file
RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is
irreversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a
setting file!
q During setting save screen display, push
[DIR/FILE] F-1 to select tree view screen.
•Push[Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select the desired folder.
•“DECODE,“SETTING”and“VOICE”foldersareavail-
able as the default.
•Afterthefolderisselected,holddown[t u] F-4 for 1
second to display content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] F-1 to select file list screen.
e Push [Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select the desired
file to be deleted.
r Hold down [REN/DEL] F-5 for 1 second.
•Confirmationscreenappears.
t Push [OK] F-6 to delete.
•Afterthedeleting,returntosettingsavescreenauto-
matically.
Unmounting USB flash drive
CAUTION:
When removing the USB flash drive, unmount op-
eration is recommended. If you do not unmount the
memory in this case, data in the USB memory may
be corrupted.
q Hold down [UNMOUNT] F-6 for 1 second.
•Confirmationscreenappears.
w Push [OK] F-6 to unmount the USB flash drive.
e After
USB
indication disappears, remove the
USB flash drive.
12-30
12 SET MODE
Formatting USB flash drive
Saved data in the USB flash drive can be erased.
IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in
the USB flash drive. Making a backup file on your
PC is recommended.
q During USB-Memory set menu display, hold down
[FORMAT] F-4 for 1 second.
•Confirmationscreenappears.
w Push [FAT] F-6 or [FAT32] F-7 to select the for-
mat type, FAT or FAT32.
•Confirmationscreenappears.
e Push [OK] F-6 to format.
•Push[CANCEL] F-7 to cancel.
r Returns to USB-Memory set menu automatically.
NOTE: If no USB flash drive is inserted and [FOR-
MAT] F-4 is selected as in step q, an error mes-
sage appears.
13-1
MAINTENANCE Section 13
Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 13-2
D Transceiver power ....................................................................... 13-2
D Transmit and receive .................................................................. 13-2
D Scanning ..................................................................................... 13-3
D Display ........................................................................................ 13-3
D Format USB flash drive .............................................................. 13-3
Main dial brake adjustment ............................................................ 13-3
SWR reading .................................................................................. 13-4
Screen type and font selections ..................................................... 13-4
Frequencycalibration(approximate) .............................................. 13-5
Opening the transceiver’s case ...................................................... 13-6
Clock backup battery replacement ................................................. 13-6
Fuse replacement ........................................................................... 13-7
Resetting the CPU .......................................................................... 13-7
About protection indications ........................................................... 13-8
Screen Saver Function ................................................................... 13-8
Troubleshooting
The following chart is designed to help you correct
problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem
or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your
nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center.
D Transceiver power
D Transmit and receive
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
No sounds from the
speaker.
Sensitivity is too low, and
only strong signals are
audible.
Received audio is unclear
or distorted.
The [ANT] switch does
not function
Transmitting is impossible.
Output power is too low.
No contact can be made
with another station.
Transmit signal is unclear
or distorted.
Repeater cannot be
accessed.
•Volumelevelistoolow.
•Thesquelchisclosed.
•Thetransceiverisintransmit.
•Theantennaisnotconnectedproperly.
•Theantennaforanotherbandisselected.
•Theantennaisnotproperlytuned.
•Theattenuatorisactivated.
•Wrongoperatingmodeisselected.
•PBTfunctionisactivated.
•NoiseblankeristurnedONwhenreceivinga
strong signal.
•Preampisactivated.
•Thenoisereductionisactivatedandthe[NR]
control is too far clockwise.
•Theantennaswitchhasnotbeenactivated.
•The operatingfrequencyisnotinside a ham
band.
•[RFPWR]issettoofarcounterclockwise
•[DRIVE]issettoofarcounterclockwise
•[MIC]issettoofarcounterclockwise
•Theantennaforanotherbandisselected.
•Theantennaisnotproperlytuned.
•RITorTX function is activated.
•Splitfrequencyfunctionisactivated.
•[MIC]issettoofarclockwise
•Splitfrequencyfunctionisnotactivated.
•Programmed subaudible tone frequency is
wrong.
•Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis-
tening level.
•Turn [SQL] to 10 o’clock position to open the
squelch.
•Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the
SENDlineofanexternalunit,ifconnected.
•Re-connecttotheantennaconnector.
•Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
•Hold down[TUNER]for1secondtomanually
tune the antenna.
•Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to select “ATT
OFF.
•Selectasuitableoperatingmode.
•Hold down [PBT-CLR] for 1 second to reset
the function.
•Push[NB]toturnthenoiseblankerOFF.
•Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the
function OFF.
•Setthe[NR]controlformaximumreadability.
•Set the antenna switch in set mode to“Auto”
or “Manual.
•Setthefrequencytobeinahamband.
•Rotate[RFPWR]clockwise.
•Set[DRIVE]toasuitableposition.
•Set[MIC]toasuitableposition.
•Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
•Holddown[TUNER]for1secondtomanually
tune the antenna.
•Push[RIT]or[TX] to turn the function OFF.
•Push[SPLIT]toturnthefunctionOFF.
•Set[MIC]toasuitableposition.
•Push[SPLIT]tototurnthefunctionON
•Resetthefrequencyusingsetmode.
p. 3-9
p. 3-9
p. 3-12
p. 10-2
p. 10-6
p. 5-10
p. 3-8
p. 5-13
p. 5-17
p. 5-10
p. 5-18
p. 10-4
p. 3-5
p. 3-12
p. 3-13
p. 3-12
p. 10-2
p. 10-6
pp. 5-11,
6-4
p. 6-6
p. 3-12
p. 6-6
p. 4-33
13-2
13 MAINTENANCE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Power does not come on
when the [POWER] switch
is pushed.
•Powercableisimproperlyconnected.
•TheinternalpowersupplyisturnedOFF.
•Circuitbreakeristripped.
•Re-connecttheACpowercablecorrectly.
•TurntheinternalpowersupplyON.
•Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit
breaker.
p. 2-5
p. 3-2
13-3
D Scanning
D Display
D Format USB flash drive
13
MAINTENANCE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Programmed scan does
not stop.
Programmed scan does
not start.
Memory scan does not
start
Select memory scan does
not start
•Squelchisopen.
•
The same frequencies have been programmed
in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2.
•2 or more memory channels have not been
programmed.
•2 or more memory channels have not been
designated as select channels.
•Set[SQL]tothethresholdpoint.
•Program different frequencies in scan edge
memory channel P1 and P2.
•Programmorethan2memorychannels.
•Designate more than 2 memory channels as
select channels for the scan.
p. 3-9
p. 8-3
p. 8-3
p. 9-7
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
The displayed frequency
does not change properly.
•Thediallockfunctionisactivated.
•Asetmodescreenisselected.
•TheinternalCPUhasmalfunctioned.
•
Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF.
•Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set
mode screen.
•ResettheCPU.
p. 5-18
p. 12-2
p. 13-7
Main dial brake adjustment
The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit
your preference.
The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of
the front panel. See the figure at left.
Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension
level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in
one direction.
Light
Heavy
[MAIN DIAL]
Brake
adjustment
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Format error appears
when formatting in FAT32
Format error appears
when formatting in FAT
•The inserted USB flash drive capacity is
smaller than 64 MB.
•The inserted USB flash drive capacity is
larger than 2 GB.
•
Insert a
USB flash drive
larger than 64 MB or
select the FAT format.
•
Insert a
USB flash drive
smaller than 2 GB or
select the FAT32 format.
p. 12-30
p. 12-30
13-4
SWR reading
The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the trans-
mission line in all modes.
q Push TUNER to turn the antenna tuner OFF.
w Hold down [METER] for 1 second to display multi-
function meter.
e Push RTTY/PSK once or twice to select RTTY
mode.
r Push TRANSMIT .
t Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise past the 12 o’clock po-
sition for more than 30 W output power.
y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.
u Push EXIT/SET to close multi-function meter.
The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter
to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1.
Screen type and font selections
2 types of screen images and 5 types of frequency
readout display fonts are available in the IC-7700.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [DISP] F-3 to enter display set mode.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to select “Display Type”
item when selecting the screen image, select “Dis-
play Font” when selecting the frequency readout
display font.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen
image or font.
•ScreenimageisselectablefromA(Blackback)andB
(Blue back).
•Basic(1),Basic(2),Italic,RoundandSlimareavail-
able for the frequency readout font.
y Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitfromdisplaysetmode.
S
ID
0
510
15
0
010
44
ALC 52V VD
20
dB
11.5 23
10 50 100 150 200 250
PO
SWR
COMP
A
W
1
59+20 +40 +60dB
S
1
0
0
0
1
2
510
10
10 20
44 52V
50 100 150 200 250
15
3
1.5
ID
VD
dB
WA
Po
SWR
COMP ALC
59+20 +40 +60dB
Better than 1.5:1
[RF PWR] RTTY/PSK EXIT/SETTUNER
TRANSMIT METER
13 MAINTENANCE
• Screen image example— 
Display Type: B, Display Font: Slim
13-5
Frequency calibration (approximate)
A very accurate frequency counter is required to
calibrate the frequency of the transceiver. However,
a rough check may be performed by receiving radio
stationWWV,WWVH,orotherstandardfrequency
signals.
CAUTION: The IC-7700 has been thoroughly
adjusted and tested at the factory before being
shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.
q Push SSB to select USB mode.
w Hold down PBT-CLR for 1 second to clear the
PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/TX func-
tion is not activated.
e Set the frequency to the standard frequency sta-
tion minus 1 kHz.
•WhenreceivingWWVorWWVH(at15.00000MHz)as
a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for
14.99900 MHz.
•Otherstandardfrequenciescanbeused.
r Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
• Calibration marker item t Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
y Push [OTHERS] F-5 to enter Others set mode.
u Push [Y] F-1 several times to select the “Calibra-
tion Marker” item.
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
tion marker ON.
o Push EXIT/SET once to return to set mode menu
screen.
!0 Push [ACC] F-2 to enter accessory set mode.
!1 Push [Z] F-2 several times to select the “REF
Adjust” item.
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with
the received standard signal as shown at left.
• REF Adjust item
•Zerobeatmeansthattwosignalsareexactlythesame
frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in Others set
mode.
!4 Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitsetmode.
Main dial
F-2F-1
ACC
F-5
OTHERS EXIT/SET
F-7
SET
/
13
MAINTENANCE
13-6
Opening the transceiver’s case
Follow the case opening procedures shown here
when you want to replace the clock backup battery or
internal fuse.
RWARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable
from the transceiver before performing any work on
the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of elec-
tric shock and/or equipment damage.
CAUTION: Thetransceiverweighsapproximately
22.5 kg (50 lb). Always have two people available
to lift or turn over the transceiver.
q Remove the rack mounting handles from both
sides. See page 2-3 for rack mounting handle de-
tachment details.
w Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans-
ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up
the top cover.
e Turn the transceiver upside-down.
CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR
ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is
being turned upside down. This may damage
the transceiver.
r Remove 7 screws from the bottom, then lift up the
bottom cover.
Clock backup battery replacement
The IC-7700 has a Lithium backup battery (CR2032)
inside for clock and timer functions. The usual life of
thebackupbatteryisapproximately2years.
When the backup battery is discharged, the trans-
ceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot
retain the current time.
RWARNING!
DISCONNECT the AC power cable
from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s
cover.
q Remove the top cover as shown above.
w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the
front panel as illustrated at left.
•Makesurethebatterypolarityiscorrect.
e Return the top cover to the original position.
r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 11-2)
13 MAINTENANCE
For Users in California (U.S.A.)
This CR2032 Lithium Battery contains Perchlorate
Material—special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
13-7
Fuse replacement
WhennoexternalDCoutputisavailablefrom[EXT
DC] and ACC connectors, the internal fuse may be
open. Replace the fuse in this case.
RWARNING!
DISCONNECT the AC power cable
from the AC outlet before removing the transceiver’s
cover.
q Remove the bottom cover as shown left.
w Remove the 8 screws from the shield cover of the
transceiver’s bottom side.
e Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated
one (FGB 2 A) as shown at left.
r Return the inside cover and bottom cover and
screws to the original position.
Resetting the CPU
q Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON.
•MakesurethetransceiverpowerisstillOFF.
w While holding down F-INP
ENT and MW , push
POWER to turn ON the power.
•TheinternalCPUisreset.
•TheCPUstart-uptakesapproximately5seconds.
ThetransceiverdisplaysitsinitialVFOfrequencies
when resetting is complete.
e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired.
NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-
tents in memory channels and returns programmed
values in set mode to default values.
The transceiver cannot be reset in the standby mode.
If the transceiver is so, release the standby mode.
q Push POWER to turn ON the power.
w Hold down POWER for 1 second to display the
dialogbox.
e Rotate the main dial or push [q] F-2 to select
“Shutdown.”
r Push POWER to turn OFF the power.
t Perform from steps w above.
MW F-IMP ENT
POWER
13
MAINTENANCE
ALL CLEAR
13-8
About protection indications
The IC-7700 has a 2-step protection function to pro-
tect the final power amplifiers.
The protector monitors the power amplifier tempera-
ture and activates when the temperature becomes
extremelyhigh.
• Power down transmission
Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W.
“LMT” appears beside the transmit indicator during
transmit.
• Transmission inhibit
Deactivates the transmitter.
The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during
transmit.
When the protector is activated, wait until the
power amplifier cools down using the transceiver in
stand-by or receive condition.
NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF
when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan
will not function and it will take longer to cool the
transceiver.
The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in
the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.
Screen saver function
The IC-7700 has a screen saver function to protect
the LCD from the “burn-in” effect.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [DISP] F-3 to enter display set mode.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 several times to select
the “Screen Saver Function” item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time pe-
riod for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 60
minutes and OFF.
•Deactivatethescreensaverwith“OFF”selection.
y Push [Z] F-2 to select the “Screen Saver Type”
item.
u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver
type from “Bound, “Rotation” and “Twist.
•Holddown[PREVIEW] F-5 to display the pattern for
your reference.
i Push EXIT/SET twicetoexitsetmode.
Check the temperature
Main dial
F-2 F-3F-1
DISP
F-5
PREVIEW EXIT/SET
F-7
SET
13 MAINTENANCE
14-1
CONTROL COMMAND Section 14
Remotejack(CI-V)information ...................................................... 14-2
DCI-Vconnectionexample ........................................................... 14-2
D Data format ................................................................................. 14-2
D Command table .......................................................................... 14-3
D Data contents description ............................................................ 14-9
14-2
Remote jack (CI-V) information
DCI-V connection example
The transceiver can be connected through an optional
CT-17 c i -v l e v e l c o n v e r t e r to a PC equipped with an
RS-232Cport.TheIcomCommunicationsInterface-V
(CI-V)controlsthetransceiver.
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be
connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port.
Seepages12-17and12-18forsettingtheCI-Vcon-
dition using set mode.
D Data format
The CI-V system can be operated using the follow-
ing data formats. Data formats differ according to
command numbers. A data area or sub command is
added for some commands.
Controller to IC-7700
FE FE 74 E0 Cn Sc Data area FD
Preamble
code (fixed)
Transceiver’s
default address
Controller’s
default address
Command number
(see the command table)
Sub command number
(see command table)
BCD code data for
frequency or memory
number entry
End of message
code (fixed)
OK message to controller
FE FE E0 74 FB FD
FE FE E0 74 FA FD
Preamble
code (fixed)
Controller’s
default address
Transceiver’s
default address
OK code
(fixed)
End of message
code (fixed)
NG message to controller
NG code
(fixed)
IC-7700 to controller
qwerty u
FE FE E0 74 Cn Sc Data area FD
qwerty u
PC
ct- 17
IC-7700 9–15 V DC
mini-plug cable
14 CONTROL COMMAND
14-3
D Command table
14
CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
00
see p. 14-10
Send frequency data for transceive
01
see p. 14-10
Send mode data for transceive
02
see p. 14-12
Read band edge frequencies
03
see p. 14-10
Read operating frequency
04
see p. 14-10
Read operating mode
05
see p. 14-10
Set operating frequency
06
see p. 14-10
Operating mode selection
07 SelectVFOmode
00 SelectVFO-A
01 SelectVFO-B
A0 EqualizeVFO-AandVFO-B
B0 ExchangeVFO-AandVFO-B
08 Select memory mode
0001 to
0099
Select memory channel
(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)
0100 Select program scan edge channel P1
0101 Select program scan edge channel P2
09 Memory write
0A MemorytoVFO
0B Memory clear
0E 00 Scan stop
01 Programmed/memory scan start
02 Programmed scan start
03 :F scan start
12 Fine programmed scan start
13 Fine :F scan start
22 Memory scan start
23 Select memory scan start
A1 Select :F scan span ±5 kHz
A2 Select :F scan span ±10 kHz
A3 Select :F scan span ±20 kHz
A4 Select :F scan span ±50 kHz
A5 Select :F scan span ±100 kHz
A6 Select :F scan span ±500 kHz
A7 Select :F scan span ±1 MHz
B0 Set as non-select channel
B1 Set as select channel
(ThepreviouslysetnumberbyCI-V
is set after turning power ON, or “1” is
selected if no selection is performed.)
01 Set as select channel “1”
02 Set as select channel “2”
03 Set as select channel “3”
B2 00 Set “ALL for select memory scan
01 Set “1” for select memory scan
02 Set “2” for select memory scan
03 Set “3” for select memory scan
D0 Set scan resume OFF
D3 Set scan resume ON
0F Read split setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
00 Turn the split function OFF
01 Turn the split function ON
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
10 00 Send/read 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step
01 Send/read 100 Hz tuning step
02 Send/read 1 kHz tuning step
03 Send/read 5 kHz tuning step
04 Send/read 9 kHz tuning step
05 Send/read 10 kHz tuning step
06 Send/read 12.5 kHz tuning step
07 Send/read 20 kHz tuning step
08 Send/read 25 kHz tuning step
11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF
06 Send/read 6 dB attenuator
12 Send/read 12 dB attenuator
18 Send/read 18 dB attenuator
12 00 00/01 Select/read ANT1 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)
01 00/01 Select/read ANT2 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)
02 00/01 Select/read ANT3 selection
(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)
03 00 Select/read ANT4 selection
(00=RXANTOFF;x)
13 00 Announce all data with voice
synthesizer
01 Announce frequency and S-meter level
with voice synthesizer
02 Announce receive mode with voice
synthesizer
14 01 0000 to
0255
Send/read [AF] level
(0000=max.CCW,0255=max.CW)
02 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF] level
(0000=max.CCW,0255=max.CW)
03 0000 to
0255
Send/read [SQL] level
(0000=max.CCW,0255=max.CW)
05 0000 to
0255
Send/read [APF] position
(0000=Pitch–550 Hz, 0128=Pitch,
0255=Pitch+550 Hz; 10 Hz steps)
06 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NR] level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
07 0000 to
0255
Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position
(0000=max.CCW,0128=center,
0255=max.CW)
08 0000 to
0255
Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position
(0000=max.CCW,0128=center,
0255=max.CW)
09 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW pitch
( 0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz,
0255=900 Hz; 5 Hz steps)
0A 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF POWER] level
(0000=max.CCW,0255=max.CW)
0B 0000 to
0255
Send/read [MIC GAIN] level
(0000=max.CCW,0255=max.CW)
0C 0000 to
0255
Send/read [KEY SPEED] level
(0000=6WPM. CCW, 0255=48WPM
0D 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NOTCH] position
(0000=max.CCW,0128=center,
0255=max.CW)
0E 0000 to
0255
Send/read [COMP] level
(0000=0, 0255=10)
0F 0000 to
0255
Send/read [DELAY] position
(0000=2.0d, 0255=13.0d)
14-4
D Command table (continued)
14 CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
14 11 0000 to
0255
Send/read [AGC] level
(0000=max.CCWto0255=max.CW)
12 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
13 0000 to
0255
Send/read [DIGI-SEL] position
(0000=max.CCWto0255=max.CW)
14 0000 to
0255
Send/readDRIVEgain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 0000 to
0255
Send/read Monitor gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
16 0000 to
0255
Send/readVOXgain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
17 0000 to
0255
Send/readAntiVOXgain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
18 0000 to
0255
Send/read [CONTRAST] level
(0=max.CCWto255=max.CW)
19 0000 to
0255
Send/read BRIGHT level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 01 00 Read squelch condition (squelch close)
01 Read squelch condition (squelch open)
02 0000 to
0255
Read S-meter level
(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60 dB)
11 0000 to
0255
Read RF power meter
(0000=0 W, 0143=100 W, 0212=200 W)
12 0000 to
0255
Read SWR meter
( 0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5,
0080=SWR2.0)
13 0000 to
0255
ReadALCmeter(0000=0,0120=Max.)
14 0000 to
0255
Read COMP meter
(0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB, 0241=30 dB)
15 0000 to
0255
ReadVDmeter
(0151=44V,0180=48V,0211=52V)
16 0000 to
0255
Read ID meter
(0000=0 A, 0165=10 A, 0241=15 A)
16 02 00 Preamp OFF
01 Preamp 1 ON
02 Preamp 2 ON
12 00 AGC OFF selection
01 AGC FAST selection
02 AGC MID selection
03 AGC SLOW selection
22 00 Noise blanker OFF
01 Noise blanker ON
32 00 AudiopeaklterOFF
01 Audio peak filter WIDE ON (320 Hz is
selected when SHARP APF is set)
02 Audio peak filter MID ON (160 Hz is
selected when SHARP APF is set)
03 Audio peak filter NAR ON (80 Hz is
selected when SHARP APF is set)
40 00 Noise reduction OFF
01 Noise reduction ON
41 00 Auto notch function OFF
01 Auto notch function ON
42 00 Repeater tone OFF
01 Repeater tone ON
43 00 Tone squelch OFF
01 Tone squelch ON
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
16 44 00 Speech compressor OFF
01 Speech compressor ON
45 00 Monitor function OFF
01 Monitor function ON
46 00 VOXfunctionOFF
01 VOXfunctionON
47 00 BK-IN function OFF
01 Semi BK-IN function ON
02 Full BK-IN function ON
48 00 Manual notch function OFF
01 Manual notch function ON
4C 00 VSCfunctionOFF
01 VSCfunctionON
4D 00 AGCVRfunctionOFF
01 AGCVRfunctionON
4E 00 DIGI-SEL function OFF
01 DIGI-SEL function ON
16 4F 00 TwinpeaklterOFF
01 TwinpeaklterON
50 00 Dial lock function OFF
01 Dial lock function ON
53 00 ANT RX-I/O function OFF
01 ANT RX-I/O function ON
55 00 15kHzroonglterselection
01 6kHzroonglterselection
02 3kHzroonglterselection
56 00 SHARPselectionforDSPltertype
01 SOFTselectionforDSPltertype
57 00 WIDE selection for manual notch width
01 MID selection for manual notch width
02 NAR selection for manual notch width
58 00 WIDE selection for SSB transmit
bandwidh
01 MID selection for SSB transmit
bandwidth
02 NAR selection for SSB transmit
bandwidth
17
see p. 14-12
Send CW messages*1
18 00 Turn ON the transceiver.
01 Turn OFF the transceiver.*2
19 00 Read the transceiver ID
1A 00
see p. 14-13
Send/read memory contents
01
see p. 14-10
Send/read band stacking register
contents
02
see p. 14-10
Send/read memory keyer contents
03 00 to 49 Send/readtheselectedlterwidth
( SSB, CW, PSK: 00=50 Hz to
40=3600 Hz; RTTY: 00=50 Hz to
31=2700 Hz; AM: 00=200 Hz to 49=10
kHz)
04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time
constant
( 00=OFF, 01=0.1/0.3 sec., 13=6.0/8.0
sec.)
*1IntheCWmode,ifthe[TRANSMIT]oranexternalTXswitchisON,or
the Break-in function is ON, a message will be transmitted as CW code
when you send it from your PC.
*2 The power ON command (18 01) is available only when the trans-
ceiver is standby mode.
14-5
D Command table (continued)
14
CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0001 see p. 12-4 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF
( HPF: 0=Through, 1=100 to 20=2000,
LPF: 5=500 to 24=2400, 25=Through)
0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level
(00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0004 see p. 12-4 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 00=Through, 01=100 to
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to
24=2400, 25=Through)
0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass)
level (00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble)
level (00=–5 to 10=+5)
0007 see p. 12-4 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 00=Through, 01=100 to
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to
24=2400, 25=Through)
0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass)
level (00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble)
level (00=–5 to 10=+5)
0010 see p. 12-5 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 00=Through, 01=100 to
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to
24=2400, 25=Through)
0011 see p. 12-5 Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 00=Through, 01=100 to
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to
24=2400, 25=Through)
0012 see p. 12-5 Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF
(HPF: 00=Through, 01=100 to
20=2000, LPF: 5=500 to
24=2400, 25=Through)
0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level
(00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5 to 10=+5)
0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass)
level (00 =–5 to 10=+5)
0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble)
level (00=–5 to 10=+5)
0019
see p. 14-12
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for wide
0020
see p. 14-12
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for mid
0021
see p. 14-12
Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for
narrow
0022 0000 to
0255
Send/read speech level
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0023 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW side tone gain
(0000=min.to0255=max.)
0024 00/01 Send/read CW side tone gain limit
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0025 0000 to
0255
Send/read beep gain
(0000=min.to0255=max.)
0026 00/01 Send/read beep gain limit
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0027 0000 to
0255
Send/read headphones output
ratio (0000=0.60 to 0255=1.40)
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0028 0000 to
0255
Send/read AF output level to ACC
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0029 0000 to
0255
Send/read S/P DIF output level
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0030 0000 to
0255
Send/read MOD output level to
ACC (0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0031 0000 to
0255
Send/read S/P DIF MOD output
level (0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0032 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector
during DATA OFF
( 00=MIC; 01=ACC; 02=MIC/ACC;
03=S/P DIF; 04=LAN)
0033 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector
during DATA1
( 00=MIC; 01=ACC; 02=MIC/ACC;
03=S/P DIF; 04=LAN)
0034 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector
during DATA2
( 00=MIC; 01=ACC; 02=MIC/ACC;
03=S/P DIF; 04=LAN)
0035 00 to 03 Send/read MOD input connector
during DATA3
( 00=MIC; 01=ACC; 02=MIC/ACC;
03=S/P DIF; 04=LAN)
0036 00/01 Send/read relay type selection
(00=Lead, 01=MOS-FET)
0037 00 to 07 Send/readexternalmeteroutput
selection
(00=Auto, 01=S, 02=Po, 03=SWR,
04=ALC,05=COMP,06=VD,07=ID)
0038 0000 to
0255
Send/readexternalmeteroutput
level (0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0039 00 to 02 Send/read reference signal in/out
setting (00=IN, 01=OFF, 02=OUT)
0040 0000 to
0255
Send/read reference signal frequency
setting (0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0041 0000 to
0255
Send/read LCD unit backlight
brightness (0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0042 0000 to
0255
Send/read switch indicator brightness
(0000=1 to 0255=100)
0043 00 to 01 Send/read screen image type
(00=A, 01=B)
0044 00 to 04 Send/read frequency readout font
(00=Basic (1), 01=Basic (2), 02=Italic,
03=Round, 04=Slim)
0045 00 to 02 Send/read meter response setting
(00=SLOW, 01=MID, 02=FAST)
0046 00 to 02 Send/read meter type
(00=Standard, 01=Edgewise, 02=Bar)
0047 00/01 Send/read meter type during wide
screen or mini scope display
(00=Edgewise, 01=Bar)
0048 00/01 Send/read peak hold set for Bar meter
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0049 00/01 Send/read memory name display
setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0050 00/01 Send/readaudiopeaklterwidth
pop-up display setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0051 00/01 Send/read manual notch width
pop-up display setting
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0052 00 to 03 Send/read screen saver set
(0=OFF, 01=15 min., 02=30 min.,
03=60 min.)
14-6
D Command table (continued)
14 CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0053 00 to 02 Set/read screen saver type
(00=Bound, 01=Rotation, 02=Twist)
0054 00/01 Send/read output signal setting for
externaldisplay(00=OFF,01=ON)
0055 00/01 Send/read synchronous pulse
level setting (00=L, 01=H)
0056 00/01 Send/read opening message display
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0057
see p. 14-11
Send/read opening message contents
0058 20000101
to
20991231
Send/read date
(20000101=1st Jan. 2000 to
20991231=31st Dec. 2099)
0059 0000 to
2359
Send/read time
(0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59)
0060 00/01 Send/read CLOCK2 function
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0061
see p. 14-10
Send/read offset time for CLOCK2
(240001=–24:00 to 240000=+24:00)
0062
see p. 14-11
Send/read CLOCK2 name
(up to 3-character)
0063 00/01 Send/read calibration marker
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0064 00/01 Send/readconrmationbeep
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0065 00 Band edge beep OFF
01 Band edge beep ON (Beep sounds with
a default amateur band)
02 Band edge beep with user setting ON
03 Band edge beep with user setting/TX
limit ON
0066 0050 to
0200
Send/read beep audio frequency
(0050=500 Hz to 0200=2000 Hz)
0067 00/01 Send/read quick split set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0068
see p. 14-11
Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to
+9.999 MHz for HF
0069
see p. 14-11
Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to
+9.999 MHz for 50 MHz
0070 00/01 Send/read split lock set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0071 00/01 Send/read tuner auto start set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0072 00/01 Send/read PTT tune set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0073 00/01 Send/read transverter set
(00=Auto, 01=ON)
0074
see p. 14-11
Send/read transverter offset
0075 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY mark frequency
( 00=1275 Hz, 01=1615 Hz,
02=2125 Hz)
0076 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY shift width
(00=170 Hz, 01=200 Hz, 02=425 Hz)
0077 00/01 Send/read RTTY keying polarity
(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)
0078 00 to 02 Send/read PSK tone frequency
( 00=1000 Hz, 01=1500 Hz,
02=2000 Hz)
0079 00/01 Send/read speech language
(00=English, 01=Japanese)
0080 00/01 Send/read speech speed
(00=Slow, 01=Fast)
0081 00/01 Send/read S-level speech
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0082 00/01 Send/read speech with a mode switch
operation (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0083 00/01 Send/read memo pad numbers
(00=5 ch, 01=10 ch)
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0084 00 to 02 Send/read main dial auto TS
(00=OFF, 01=Low, 02=High)
0085 00/01 Send/read mic. up/down speed
(00=Low, 01=High)
0086 00/01 Send/read quick RIT/:TX clear function
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0087 00 to 02 Send/read SSB notch operation
(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)
0088 00 to 02 Send/read AM notch operation
(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)
0089 00/01 Send/read DIGI-SEL control function
(00=DIGI-SEL, 01=APF)
0090 00/01 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous
tuning function (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0091 00/01 Send/read CW normal side set
(00=LSB, 01=USB)
0092 00/01 Set/read APF type
(00=SHARP, 01=SOFT)
0093 00/01 Send/readexternalkeypadset
for voice memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0094 00/01 Send/readexternalkeypadset
for keyer memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0095 00/01 Send/readCI-Vtransceiveset
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0096 00/01 Send/read RS-232C function
(00=CI-V,01=Decode)
0097 00 to 04 Send/read RS-232C decode
Baud rate (00=300, 01=1200, 02=4800,
03=9600, 04=19200)
0098 00 to 10 Send/read keyboard type
(00=English, 01=Japanese,
02=United Kingdom, 03=French,
04=French (Canadian),
05=German, 06=Portuguese,
07=Portuguese (Brazilian),
08=Spanish, 09=Spanish (Latin
American), 10=Italian)
0099 0010 to
0100
Send/read keyboard repeat delay
( 0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.;
50 msec. steps)
0100 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat rate
(00=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps)
0101 Send/read IP address set
(0000000000000001=0.0.0.1 to
0255025502550254=255.255.255.254)
0102 01 to 30 Send/read subnet mask
(01=128.0.0.0 to 30=255.255.255.252)
0103 00/01 Send/read scope display during
TX (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0104 00/01 Send/readscopemax.hold
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0105 00 to 02 Send/read scope center frequency
set (00=Filter center, 01=Carrier
point center, 02=Carrier point center
(Abs. Freq.))
0106
see p. 14-11
Send/read waveform color for receiving
signal
0107
see p. 14-11
Send/readwaveformcolorformax.hold
0108 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±2.5
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0109 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±5
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0110 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±10
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0111 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±25
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0112 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±50
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
14-7
D Command table (continued)
14
CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0113 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±100
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0114 00 to 02 Send/read scope sweep speed for ±250
kHz span (00=Slow, 01=Mid., 02=Fast)
0115
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band
0116
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 1.60 to 2.00 MHz band
0117
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 2.00 to 6.00 MHz band
0118
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 6.00 to 8.00 MHz band
0119
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 8.00 to 11.00 MHz band
0120
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
0121
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
0122
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
0123
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
0124
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
0125
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
0126
see p. 14-11
Send/read scope edge frequencies
for 45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
0127 00/01 Send/read auto voice monitor set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0128 03 to 10 Send/read voice memory short
play time (03=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.)
0129 05 to 15 Send/read voice memory normal
record time (05= 5 sec. to 30=30 sec.)
0130 00 Normal selection for contest number
style
01 190ANO” selection for contest
number style
02 190ANT” selection for contest
number style
03 90NO” selection for contest number
style
04 90NT” selection for contest number
style
0131 01 to 04 Send/read count up trigger channel
(01=M1, 02=M2, 03=M3, 04=M4)
0132 0001 to
9999
Send/read present number
(0001=1, 9999=9999)
0133 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time
(01=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)
0134 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio
(28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)
0135 00 to 03 Send/read rise time
(00=2 msec., 01=4 msec.,
02=6 msec., 03=8 msec.)
0136 00/01 Send/read paddle polarity
(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)
0137 00 to 02 Send/read keyer type (00=Straight,
01=Bug-key, 02=ELEC-Key)
0138 00/01 Send/read mic. up/down keyer set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0139 00 to 03 Send/read FFT scope averaging set for
RTTY decoder
(00=OFF, 01=2, 02=3, 03=4)
0140
see p. 14-11
Send/read FFT scope waveform
color set for RTTY decoder
0141 00/01 Send/read RTTY decode USOS
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0142 00/01 Send/read RTTY decode new line code
(00=CR,LF,CR+LF, 01=CR+LF)
0143 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY diddle (00=OFF,
01=Blank, 02=LTRS (Letter code))
0144 00/01 Send/read RTTY TX USOS
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0145 00/01 Send/read RTTY auto CR+LF by TX
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0146 00/01 Send/read RTTY time stamp set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0147 00/01 Send/read clock selection for time
stamp(0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2)
0148 00/01 Send/read frequency stamp
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0149
see p. 14-11
Send/readreceivedtextfontcolor
0150
see p. 14-11
Send/readtransmittedtextfontcolor
0151
see p. 14-11
Send/readtimestamptextfontcolor
0152
see p. 14-11
Send/readtextfontcolorinTXbuffer
0153 Send/read FFT scope averaging set for
PSK decoder
(00=OFF, 01=2, 02=3, 03=4)
0154
see p. 14-11
Send/read FFT scope waveform
color set for PSK decoder
0155 00/01 Send/read PSK AFC function tuning
range (00=±8 Hz, 01=±15 Hz)
0156 00/01 Send/read PSK time stamp set
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0157 00/01 Send/read clock selection for time
stamp (00=Local time, 01=CLOCK2)
0158 00/01 Send/read frequency stamp
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0159
see p. 14-11
Send/readreceivedtextfontcolorfor
PSK decoder
0160
see p. 14-11
Send/readtransmittedtextfontcolor
(PSK)
0161
see p. 14-11
Send/readtimestamptextfontcolor
(PSK)
0162
see p. 14-11
Send/readtextfontcolorinTXbuffer
(PSK)
0163 00/01 Send/read scan speed
(00=Low, 01=High)
0164 00/01 Send/read scan resume
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0165
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
0.03 to 1.60 MHz band
0166
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
1.60 to 2.00 MHz band
0167
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
2.00 to 6.00 MHz band
0168
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
6.00 to 8.00 MHz band
0169
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
8.00 to 11.00 MHz band
0170
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
11.00 to 15.00 MHz band
0171
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
15.00 to 20.00 MHz band
0172
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
20.00 to 22.00 MHz band
0173
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
22.00 to 26.00 MHz band
0174
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
26.00 to 30.00 MHz band
0175
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
30.00 to 45.00 MHz band
0176
see p. 14-12
Send/read antenna selection for
45.00 to 60.00 MHz band
14-8
14 CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0177 00/01 Send/read antenna temporary memory
set (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0178 00 to 02 Send/read antenna selection
(00=OFF, 01=Manual, 02=Auto)
0179 00/01 Send/read usage for ANT2
(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX)
0180 00/01 Send/read usage for ANT3
(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX)
0181 00 to 02 Send/read usage for ANT4
(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX, 02= RX)
0182 00 to 20 Send/readVOXdelay
(00=0.0 sec. to 20=2.0 sec.)
0183 00 to 03 Send/readVOXvoicedelay
(00=OFF, 01=Short, 02=Mid., 03=Long)
0184 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (00=1 to 09=10)
0185 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB width
(0000=0 to 0255=255)
0186 00/01 Send/readexternalkeypadset
for RTTY memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0187 00/01 Send/readexternalkeypadset
for PSK memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0188 00/01 Voicememorytransmissionsetfor
[F1]– [F4] on the keyboard (00=OFF,
01=ON)
0189 00/01 Memory keyer transmission set for [F1]–
[F4] on the keyboard (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0190 00 Send/read time-out timer OFF
01 Send/read 3 min. time-out timer
02 Send/read 5 min. time-out timer
03 Send/read 10 min. time-out timer
04 Send/read 20 min. time-out timer
05 Send/read 30 min. time-out timer
0191 00 to 06 Send/read APF AF level.
(00=0 dB to 06=+6dB)
0192 0000 to
0255
Send/read LAN MOD output level
(0000=0% to 0255=100%)
0193 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (HF)
( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms,
03=20 ms, 04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)
0194 00 to 05
Send/read the TX Delay setting (50M)
( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms,
03=20 ms, 04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)
0195 00, 01 Send/read the Shutdown function.
( 00=Shutdown, 01=Standby/Shut-
down)
0196 0000 to
0223
Send/read the transceive CI-V Ad-
dressforLANtoREMOTEinhexa-
decimal code.
(0000=00h to 0223=DFh)
0197 Send/read the default gateway set
( 0000000000000001=0.0.0.1 to 0255
025502550254=255.255.255.254, or
FF=Blank)
0198 00, 01 Send/read the remote control capabil-
ity. (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0199 000001 to
065535
Send/read the control port setting by
accessing from internet.
(000001=1 to 065535=65535)
0200 000001 to
065535
Send/read the serial port setting by
accessing from internet.
(000001=1 to 065535=65535)
0201 000001 to
065535
Send/read the audio port setting by
accessing from internet.
(000001=1 to 065535=65535)
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 05 0202 00, 01 Send/read the internet access line
setting.
( 00=FTTH (Fiber To The Home),
01=ADSL/CATV)
0203
see p. 14-14
Send/read Network radio name
(up to 16-character)
0204 00 to 04 Send/readthemaximumAFsample
rates for remote stations.
( 00=8 kHz, 01=12 kHz, 02=16 kHz,
03=24 kHz, 04=48 kHz)
0205 00 to 02 Send/read the AF codecs for remote
stations.
( 00=LPCM 8bit,
01=LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit,
02=LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit)
0206 00, 01 Send/read the network TX audio set-
ting for remote stations.
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0207 00 to 04 Send/readthemaximummodulation
sample rates for remote stations.
( 00=8 kHz, 01=12 kHz, 02=16 kHz,
03=24 kHz, 04=48 kHz)
0208 00 to 02 Send/read the modulation codecs for
remote stations.
( 00=LPCM 8bit,
01=LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit,
02=LPCM 8bit, u-law 8bit, LPCM 16bit)
0209 00, 01 Send/read the waveform outline indi-
cation on the spectrum scope.
(00=Fill, 01=Fill+Line)
0210
see p. 14-11
Send/read the waveform outline color
for receiving signal.
0211 00, 01 Send/read the waterfall display on the
Spectrum scope. (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0212 00 to 07 Send/read the peak color level for
displaying the waterfall.
00=Grid 1, 01=Grid 2, 02=Grid 3,
03=Grid 4, 04=Grid 5, 05=Grid 6,
06=Grid 7, 07=Grid 8
0213 00, 01 Send/read waveform type on the
Audio FFT scope.
(00=Fill, 01=Line)
0214
see p. 14-11
Send/read waveform color for Audio
FFT scope.
0215 00, 01 Send/read the waterfall display on the
Audio FFT scope. (00=OFF, 01=ON)
0216
see p. 14-11
Send/read waveform color for Audio
Oscilloscope scope.
0217 00, 01 Send/read the voice 1st menu.
(00=VOICE-Root,01=VOICE-PLAY)
0218 01 to 15 Send/read the repeat interval to
transmit the recorded voice audio.
(01=1 sec. to 15=15 sec.)
0219 00, 01 Send/read the recording mode.
(00=TX&RX, 01=RX Only)
0220 00, 01 Send/read the squelch status for the
RX voice audio recording
(00=Always, 01=Squelch Auto)
0221 00, 01 Send/read the QSO audio record file
Split function setting.
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0222 00, 01 Send/read the PTT Automatic Re-
cording function setting.
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
0223 00 to 03 Send/read QSO PLAY Skip time.
( 00=3 sec., 01=5 sec., 02=10 sec.,
03=30 sec.)
D Command table (continued)
14-9
14
CONTROL COMMAND
D Command table (continued)
Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description
1A 06
see p. 14-11
Send/read DATA mode with filter set
07 00 WIDE selection for SSB transmit
bandwidth
01 MID selection for SSB transmit
bandwidth
02 NAR selection for SSB transmit
bandwidth
08 00 SHARPselectionforDSPltertype
01 SOFTselectionforDSPltertype
09 00 3kHzroonglterselection
01 6kHzroonglterselection
02 15kHzroonglterselection
0A 00 WIDE selection for manual notch width
01 MID selection for manual notch width
02 NAR selection for manual notch width
1B 00
see p. 14-11
Send/read repeater tone frequency
01
see p. 14-11
Send/read TSQL tone frequency
1C 00 00 Transceiver’s condition (RX)
01 Transceiver’s condition (TX)
01 00 Antenna tuner OFF (through)
01 Antenna tuner ON
02 Tuning
02 00, 01 Send/read transmit frequency monitor
setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)
1E 00 Read number of available TX frequency
band
01
see p. 14-12
Read TX band edge frequencies
02 Read number of user-set TX frequency
band
03
see p. 14-12
Send/read user-set TX band edge
frequencies
21 00
see p. 14-12
Send/read RIT frequency.
01 00, 01 Send/read RIT setting.
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
02 00, 01 Send/read TX setting.
(00=OFF, 01=ON)
14-10
14 CONTROL COMMAND
• Operating frequency
Command : 00, 03, 05
q
XXXXX
we
X
rt
XX00
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0
(Fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0
(Fixed)
• Operating mode
Command : 01, 04, 06
q
XXXX
w
q Operating mode w Filter setting
00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL1
01: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL2
02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3
03: CW 12: PSK
04: RTTY 13: PSK-R
Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01
and 06. In that case, “FIL1” is selected with command
01andthedefaultltersettingoftheoperatingmode
is selected with command 06, automatically.
• Memory keyer contents
Command : 1A 02
X
q: Channel data
01M1
02M2
03M3
04M4
w&1: Text data
XXX…… XX
•Characterscode
Character ASCII code Description
0–9 30–39 Numerals
A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters
space 20 Word space
/ 2F Symbol
? 3F Symbol
, 2C Symbol
. 2E Symbol
@ 40 Symbol
^ 5E Example:TosendBT, enter
^BT (5E4254)
2A Inserts contest number (can be
used for 1 channel only)
• Band stacking register
Command : 1A 01
q
XXXX
w
q Frequency band code
Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)
01 1.8 1.800000– 1.999999
02 3.5 3.400000– 4.099999
03 7 6.900000– 7.499999
04 10 9.900000–10.499999
05 14 13.900000–14.499999
06 18 17.900000–18.499999
07 21 20.900000–21.499999
08 24 24.400000–25.099999
09 28 28.000000–29.999999
10 50 50.000000–54.000000
11 GENE Other than above
w Register code
Code Registered No.
01 1 (latest)
02 2
03 3 (oldest)
Forexample,whenreadingtheoldestcontentsinthe
21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.
When sending the contents, the following code should
be added after code w.
eui, o!0!1!3 !4!6
XX... XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX
q, w
eu Operating frequency setting
See“•Operatingfrequency.
i, o Operating mode setting
See“•Operatingmode.
!0 Data mode setting
1 byte data (XX)
XX
!0
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
!1!3 Repeater tone frequency setting
!4!6 Tone squelch frequency setting
See“•Repeatertone/tonesquelchsetting.
• Clock 2 offset time setting
Command : 1A 05 0061
X
Shift direction
00: + (plus)
01: − (minus)
Offset time
0000−2400
XXX XX
D Data contents description
14-11
14
CONTROL COMMAND
• Offset frequency setting
Command : 1A 05 0068, 0069, 0074
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–9
1 MHz digit: 0–9
Direction:
00=+ direction
01=– direction
q
0XXXXXX
we
0
r*
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.
Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.
•  Codes for memory name, opening 
message and CLOCK2 name contents
- Character’s code— Alphabetical characters
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
A–Z 41–5A a-z 61–7A
- Character’s code— Symbols
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
& 26 \ 5C
? 3F 22
27 ` 60
^ 5E + 2B
2D 2A
/ 2F . 2E
, 2C : 3A
; 3B = 3D
< 3C > 3E
( 28 ) 29
[ 5B ] 5D
{ 7B } 7D
| 7C _ 5F
¯ 7E @ 40
Command Set item/available characters
1A 00 Memory name
All characters are available.
1A 050058 Opening message
Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (− / .
@) and space are available.
1A 050063 CLOCK2 name
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some
symbols (! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱/ . , : ; = < >
( ) [ ] { } | _ ¯ @) and space are available.
• Color setting 
Command : 1A 05 0106, 0107, 0140, 0149, 0150,
0151, 0152, 0154, 0159, 0160,
0161, 0162, 0210, 0214, 0216
q
0XXX0XXX0XXX
werty
R (Red)
0000–0255
G (Green)
0000–0255
B (Blue)
0000–0255
• Bandscope edge frequency setting
Command : 1A 05 0115, 0116, 0117, 0118, 0119,
0120, 0121, 0122, 0123, 0124,
0125, 0126
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
q
XXXXXXXXXXXX
werty
Lower edge Higher edge
• Data mode with filter width setting
Command : 1A 06
q
XX XX
w
00=Data mode OFF
01=FIL1
02=FIL2
03=FIL3
00=Data mode OFF
01=Data mode 1 (D1)
02=Data mode 2 (D2)
03=Data mode 3 (D3)
•  Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency 
setting
Command : 1B 00, 1B 01
100Hz digit: 0–2
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
0.1 Hz digit: 0–9
Fixed digit: 0*
Fixed digit: 0*
q*
00XXX
we
X
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.
14-12
14 CONTROL COMMAND
• SSB transmission passband width setting
The following data sequence is used when sending or
reading the SSB transmission passband width setting.
Command : 1A 05 0019, 0020, 0021
XX
Higher edge: 0=2500 Hz
1=2700 Hz
2=2800 Hz
3=2900 Hz
Lower edge: 0=100 Hz
1=200 Hz
2=300 Hz
3=500 Hz
•  Antenna memory setting
The following codes are used when sending or read-
ing the antenna memory setting.
Command : 1A 05 0165–0176
Data Antenna selection
for TX for RX
00 ANT1
01 ANT2
02 ANT3
03 ANT4
04* ANT1 ANT4
05* ANT2 ANT4
06* ANT3 ANT4
*“RX” should be selected for ANT4.
•  RIT frequency setting
Command : 21 00
10 Hz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0–9
1 Hz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
XXXX XX
00: + (plus)
01: – (minus)
•  Band edge frequency setting
Command 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03
q
XXX
wertyuio!0!1!2
XXXXXXXXX2DXXXXXXXXXX
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
Separator (fixed)
Lower edge Higher edge
Edge number*: 01–30
* Edge number setting is not necessary with com-
mand 02.
•  Codes for CW message contents
To send CW messages, the following character codes
are used.
Command : 17 Up to 30 characters
• “FF” stops sending CW messages.
•  “^” is used to transmit a string of characters with
no inter-character space.
D Data contents description (continued)
Character ASCII code
0–9 30–39
A–Z 41–5A
a–z 61–7A
/ 2F
? 3F
. 2E
2D
, 2C
: 3A
Character ASCII code
27
( 28
) 29
= 3D
+ 2B
22
@ 40
Space 20
14-13
14
CONTROL COMMAND
D Data contents description (continued)
q, w Memory channel number
0001–0099 : Memory channel 1 to 99
0100 : Programmed scan edge P1
0101 : Programmed scan edge P2
To clear the memory channel contents, add the
code “FF” after the momory channel number. (in-
stead of the data e to @7.
This completes the memory clearing.
e Split setting, Select memory setting
e
XX
0=OFF
1= 1
2= 2
3= 3
0=Split OFF
1=Split ON
When setting the programmed scan edges P1 or P2,
you must select OFF for both settings.
ri Operating frequency setting
See“•Operatingfrequency.
o, !0 Operating mode setting
See“•Operatingmode.
!1 Data mode and tone type settings
XX
!1
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
!2!4 Repeater tone frequency setting
!5!7 Tone squelch frequency setting
See“•Repeatertone/tonesquelchsetting.
!8@7 Memory name setting
Up to 10 characters.
See“•Codesformemoryname,openingmessage
and Clock 2 name contents.
• Memory content setting
Command : 1A 00
X
eri
r!7:
r!7
r!7.
o, !0 !1 !2!4 !5!7
XXX ... .........XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XX XX
q, w !8@7
Are programmed in the same manner as
When the split setting is ON, these settings are the matching transmit settings.
Even when the split setting is OFF, these settings are still necessay.
Be sure the settings are compatible with the specifications of the IC-7700.
14-14
14 CONTROL COMMAND
D Data contents description (continued)
•  Codes for Network Radio name contents
Command : 1A 05 0203
- Character’s code— Number
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
0–9 30–39
- Character’s code— Alphabetical characters
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
A–Z 41–5A a-z 61–7A
- Character’s code— Symbols
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
& 26 ? 3F
22 27
` 60 ^ 5E
+ 2B 2D
2A / 2F
. 2E , 2C
: 3A ; 3B
= 3D < 3C
> 3E ( 28
) 29 [ 5B
] 5D { 7B
} 7D | 7C
_ 5F ¯ 7E
@ 40
15-1
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 15
Specifications ................................................................................. 15-2
D General ....................................................................................... 15-2
D Transmitter .................................................................................. 15-2
D Receiver ...................................................................................... 15-3
D Antenna tuner ............................................................................. 15-3
Options ........................................................................................... 15-4
15-2
Specifications
D General
• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz) :
Receiver 0.030000–60.000000*1
Transmitter 1.800000–1.999999*2, 3.500000–3.999999*2,
5.255000 5.405000*1,, 7.000000–7.300000*2,
10.100000–10.150000*2, 14.000000–14.350000*2,
18.068000–18.168000*2, 21.000000–21.450000*2,
24.890000–24.990000*2, 28.000000–29.700000*2,
50.000000–54.000000*2
*1 Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.
*2 Depending on versions.
• Operating mode  : J3E (USB/LSB), A1A (CW), F1B (RTTY),
G1B (PSK31), A3E (AM), F3E (FM)
• Number of memory channels : 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)
• Antenna connector : SO-239×4 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω)
• Operating temperature range  : 0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to +122˚F
• Frequency stability : Less than ±0.05 ppm (approximately5minutesafter
from turn the main power, [I/O], ON, 0–50˚C; 32–122˚F)
• Frequency resolution  : 1 Hz
• Power supply requirement  : 85–265VAC(universalinput)
• Power consumption  :
Receive Stand-by 200VAtypical
Max.audio 210VAtypical
Transmit at200W 800VA
• Dimensions (projections not included) : 425×149×437 mm; 16.7×5.9×17.2 in
• Weight  : Approximately22.5kg;50lb
• ACC 1 connector  : 8-pin DIN connector
• ACC 2 connector  : 7-pin DIN connector
• Display* : 7-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD (800×480)
• EXT-DISPLAY connector  : D-sub 15S
• CI-V connector  : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (18)
• RS-232C connector  : D-sub 9-pin
• USB connector  : USB (Universal Serial Bus)1.1/2.0×2
D Transmitter
• Transmit output power  :
SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31, FM
5–200 W
AM 5–50 W
• Modulation system  :
SSB D.P.S.N. modulation
AM Digital low power modulation
FM Digital phase modulation
• Spurious emission  :
Harmonics More than 60 dB (HF bands)
More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)
Unwanted emission More than 50 dB (HF bands)
(exceptHarmonics) More than 66 dB (50 MHz band)
Out of band emission More than 40 dB (HF bands)
More than 60 dB (50 MHz band)
• Carrier suppression  : More than 63 dB
• Unwanted side-band suppression  : More than 80 dB
• TX variable range : ±9.999 kHz
• Microphone connector  : 8-pin connector (600 Ω)
• ELEC-KEY connector  : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14)
• KEY connector  : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14)
• RELAY connector  : Phono (RCA)
• ALC connector  : Phono (RCA)
15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
15-3
D Receiver
•Receive system : Double conversion superheterodyne system
•Intermediate frequencies :
1st 64.455 MHz
2nd 36 kHz
•Sensitivity (typical) :
SSB, CW, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N)
0.100000– 1.799999MHz 0.5µV(Preamp 1 ON)
1.800000–29.990000MHz 0.16µV(Preamp 1 ON)
50.000000–54.000000MHz 0.13µV(Preamp 2 ON)
AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N)
0.100000– 1.799999MHz 6.3µV(Preamp 1 ON)
1.800000–29.990000MHz 2µV(Preamp 1 ON)
50.000000–54.000000MHz 1µV(Preamp 2 ON)
FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
28.000000–29.990000MHz 0.5µV(Preamp 1 ON)
50.000000–54.000000MHz 0.32µV(Preamp 2 ON)
• Internal Modulate Distortion (typical) : Dynamic range 109 dB (at 14.100 MHz, 100 kHz separation,
Preamp OFF, CW mode; BW=500 Hz)
• Selectivity  :
SSB, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–3 dB
Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB
CW (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–3 dB
Less than 700 Hz/–60 dB
AM (BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–3 dB
Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB
FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB
• Spurious and image rejection ratio  : More than 70 dB
• Squelch sensitivity (Preamp OFF) :
SSB,CW,RTTY,PSK31 Lessthan5.6µV
FM Lessthan1µV
• RIT variable range  : ±9.999 kHz
• Audio output power  : More than 2.6 W at 10% distortion with an 8 Ω load
• PHONES connector  : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14)
• EXT-SP connectors  : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (18)/8 Ω
D Antenna tuner
• Matching impedance range  : 16.7 to 150 Ω unbalanced (HFbands;VSWRbetterthan3:1)
20 to 125 Ω unbalanced
(50MHzband;VSWRbetterthan
2.5:1)
• Minimum operating input  : 8 W (HF bands)
15 W (50 MHz band)
• Tuning accuracy  : VSWR1.5:1orless
• Insertion loss (after tuning) : Less than 1.0 dB
15
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
* The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunc-
tion or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays.
Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and
does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
•0.15MHz •0.23MHz 0.31MHz •10MHz
Spurioussignalsmaybedisplayedonthespectrumscopescreenregardlessofthetransceiver’sstate(Txor
Rx).Theyaregeneratedinthescopecircuit.Thisdoesnotindicateatransceivermalfunction.
All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.
•IC-PW1/EURO
h f
/50
m h
z
a l l b a n d
1
k
w l i n e a r a m p l i f i e r
Full-duty-cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an
automatic antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning and
band selection capability when used with an Icom
transceiver. Full break-in (QSK) operation. The
amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control
unit can be separately installed.
•SM-50 d e s k t o p m i c r o p h o n e
Unidirectional, dynamic
microphone for base sta-
tion operation. Includes
[UP]/[DOWN] switches, a
low cut switch and mic gain
control.
15-4
Options
15 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
•SM-30 d e s k t o p m i c r o p h o n e
Unidirectional, electret micro-
phone for base station opera-
tion. Includes [UP]/[DOWN]
switches, low cut switch and
mic gain control.
SP-34 e x t e r n a l s p e a k e r
4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2 transceiv-
ers.
•Inputimpedance :8
•Max.inputpower :5W
•HM-36 h a n d m i c r o p h o n e
Hand microphone equipped
with [UP]/[DOWN] switches.
•CT-17 c i -v l e v e l c o n v e r t e r
This unit converts signal levels from RS-232C data
totheserialCI-Vdata.Thiscanbeusedforremote
transceiver control using PC. You can change fre-
quencies, operating mode, memory channels, etc.
(software is not included)
Approved Icom optional equipment is designed for optimal performance when used with an Icom transceiver.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction or damage to an Icom transceiver in the event the Icom transceiver is
used with equipment that is not manufactured or approved by Icom.
SP-33 e x t e r n a l s p e a k e r
Designed for base station operation.
•Inputimpedance :8
•Max.inputpower :5W
RS-BA1 ip r e m o t e c o n t r o l s o f t w a r e
To remotely control radios using the RS-BA1, BE SURE
that you comply with your local regulations.
16-1
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 16
General ........................................................................................... 16-2
Caution ........................................................................................... 16-2
Preparation ..................................................................................... 16-3
D Firmware and firm utility ............................................................. 16-3
D File downloading ....................................................................... 16-3
Firmware update— USB flash drive ............................................... 16-4
Firmware update— PC ................................................................... 16-6
D Connections ................................................................................ 16-6
D IP address setting ....................................................................... 16-7
D Updating from a PC .................................................................... 16-8
16-2
General
The IC-7700’s firmware can be updated if desired. By
updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added
and the improvement of performance parameters can
be obtained.
2 methods of firmware update are available: one uses
the USB flash drive, and the other uses a PC. You
can choose either methods according to your PC ca-
pabilities.
WhenonlyonePCconnectedtotheInternetis
available
Refer to Preparation (p. 16-3) and Firmware
update
— USB flash drive (p. 16-4)
•WhentwoormorePCsconnectedtotheInternet
are available and they are connected to a LAN
(Local Area Network)
Refer to Preparation (p. 16-3) and either
Firmware update— PC (p. 16-6) or
Firmware update— USB flash drive (p. 16-4)
Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the
firmware if you have no PC.
D Firmware confirmation
The firmware version of the IC-7700 can be confirmed
during turning power ON.
•Thefirmwareversionappearsattherightbottomcorner.
Caution
CAUTION: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF
while updating the firmware.
You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when
the transceiver displays that rebooting is required.
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power
failure occurs during updating, the transceiver
firmware will be corrupted and you will have to send
the transceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for
repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if the
warranty period is still valid.
Recommendation!
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to
the USB flash drive before starting the firmware up-
date is recommended.
Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or re-
turned to default settings when the firmware update is
performed.
At least one available USB (2.0 or 1.1) port is
required to copy the downloaded firmware file.
An Ethernet card/board (10 BASE-T/100 BASE TX
compatible) is required when updating the firmware
from the PC.
The USB hub and Ethernet card/board are not sup-
plied by Icom.
Ask your PC dealer about a USB hub and an
Ethernet card/board for details.
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
2.00 Firmware
version
Preparation
D Firmware and firm utility
The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-
loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet.
Access the following URL to download the firm utility
and the latest firmware.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
For updating from the USB flash drive
When updating the firmware from the USB flash
drive, copy the downloaded firmware data (example:
7700_200.dat) to the USB flash drive (in “IC-7700” folder)
using an available USB port (USB hub may be required;
purchased separately from your PC dealer).
D File downloading
q Access the following URL.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
w Click [Support] button.
e Click “Firmware Updates/Software Downloads” link
then click the firmware file link.
r Click the desired firmware file link in IC-7700
group.
t Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,
then click [AGREE].
y Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.
u Select the desired location in which you want to
save the firmware, then click [Save] in the dis-
played File Download dialog.
•Filedownloadstarts.
iAfterdownloadiscompleted,extractthefile.
Thefirmwareandthefirmutilityarecompressedin
“zip” format, respectively.
WhenupdatingthetransceiverusingwiththeUSB
flashdrive,copytheextractedfirmware(example:
7700_200.dat) to the USB flash drive’s IC-7700 folder.
•TheUSBflashdrivemusthavebeenformattedbythe
IC-7700. (p. 12-30)
Select the saving
location
Click
7700_200.dat
Click
Click
Read carefully
16-3
16
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-4
Firmware update— USB flash drive
When updating the firmware with the USB flash drive,
no IP address or subnet mask settings are necessary.
q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB
flash drive (“IC-7700” folder).
•TheUSBflashdrivemusthavebeenformattedbythe
IC-7700.
w Insert the USB flash drive into the USB connector.
e Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
r Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
t Push [USB] F-7 to select USB-Memory set menu.
y Hold down [FIRM UP] F-3 for 1 second.
u Read the displayed precaution carefully.
•Push[Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 to scroll the display.
•Push[CANCEL] F-7 to cancel the firmware updating.
i After you read and understand all of the precau-
tions, push [OK] F-6 .
•[OK] F-6 appears only following the precautions.
•Push[CANCEL] F-7 to cancel the firmware updating.
o Push [Y] F-2 or [Z] F-3 to select the firmware
file, then push [FIRM UP] F-4 .
!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.
!1 If you agree, hold down [OK] F-6 for 1 second to
start the firmware update.
•Push[CANCEL] F-7 to cancel the firmware updating.
!2 While loading the firmware from the USB flash
drive, the dialog as at left is displayed.
/
DIR/FILE
F-1
F-7
USB CANCELFIRM UP
FIRM UP
F-6
OK
F-3
F-4
/
SET //
/
F-2
EXIT/SET
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-5
!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-
ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia-
log at left is displayed.
RWARNING! NEVER turn the IC-7700 power
OFF at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution at left
is displayed.
!5 Read the precaution carefully, and then push
[OK] F-6 .
•ReturntoUSB-Memorysetmenu.
!6 Push POWER to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then
ON again.
!7Dependingontheupdate,oneortwodialogboxes
as at left appear in sequence.
RWARNING! NEVER turn the IC-7700 power
OFF at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updat-
ing is completed and normal operation screen ap-
pears.
Please wait for 10sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
Please wait for 25sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
TRX-DSP UPDATING...SCOPE-DSP UPDATING...
16
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-6
Firmware update — PC
D Connections Connect the IC-7700 and the PC through a LAN
(Local Area Network) as follows.
*Purchased separately
to WAN
/Internet network
Ethernet cable*
(Patch cable) to crossover port
• IP address setting example
Hub/Router*
IC-7700
(192.168.0.10)
PC1
(192.168.0.11)
PC2
(192.168.0.12)
IC-7700
192.168.0.10
255.255.255.0
IP address
Subnet mask
PC2
192.168.0.11
255.255.255.0
PC2
192.168.0.12
255.255.255.0
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-7
D IP address setting When updating the firmware from the USB flash
drive, the following settings are not necessary.
IMPORTANT!Afixed(static)IPaddressisusedfor
the IC-7700.
When you connect the IC-7700 to a LAN, ask the
network manager about a usable/assignable IP
address and the subnet mask in advance.
NEVER use an IP address that has already been
used with another device in the network. If the IP
address is duplicated, the network will crash.
q Push EXIT/SET several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] F-7 to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] F-5 to select Others set mode.
r Push [Y] F-1 or [Z] F-2 several times to select
“IP Address” item.
t Push [t u] F-3 to select the desired part then
rotate the main dial to set the desired or specified
IP address.
•“192.168.0.10”isthedefaultsetting.
y Push [Z] F-2 to select “Subnet Mask” item.
u Rotate the main dial to set the desired or specified
subnet mask.
•“255.255.255.0”isthedefaultsetting.
i Push POWER to turn the transceiver power OFF,
then ON to enable the IP address and subnet
mask settings.
F-2 F-3F-1
Ω ≈
F-5
OTHERS EXIT/SET
F-7
SET
16
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-8
D Updating from a PC
q Start up the IC-7700 Firm Utility.
•Thewindowasatleftappears.
w Read the caution in the window carefully.
e Click [Yes] if you agree and continue the firmware
updating.
rSelectthefirmwarefile,thathas“dat”extension
(example:7700_200.dat).
•Click[…],thenselectthefile,aswellasthelocation.
t Type the IC-7700’s IP address into “IC-7700 IP Ad-
dress”textbox.
y Click [Start].
u The window as at left appears.
Read the precaution in the window carefully.
i Click [Yes] if you want to start the firmware update.
Updating the main CPU firmware first.
It will take approx. 1 minute.
DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until "Completed" dialog is displayed.
Depending on the updated contents, the sub CPU and/or DSP firmware will
automatically be updated when rebooting the IC-7700 and this will take
approx. 2 minutes. DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal
operational screen appears, in such case.
Do you wish to start the firmware update?
Click to start the
firmware update
IC-7700 IP Address
Version 1.00
(C) 2007 Icom Inc.
Firmware File Name
Turn the IC-7700 power ON.
When the normal operational screen appears, set the firmware file name
and IP address, then click [Start] button.
IC-7700 Firm Utility
Click […] to select the firmware file.
Type the IC-7700’s IP address here.
Do you agree to all of the above?
i7700
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
Firm Utility
===CAUTION===
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-7700 may
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc.(Japan) may be the only way to
fixit.
You undertake the updating of the firmware at you own risk and responsibility,
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.
Also all preciously set conditions, the memory contents, etc will be lost when
making a firmware update.
Making a backup file of programmed contents and settings onto the USB-
Memory before updating is recommended.
Click to
continue
16 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
16-9
o The screen as at left is displayed.
•ThefollowingdialogappearsintheIC-7700display.
RWARNING! NEVER turn the IC-7700 power
OFF at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!0 Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.
•The“FIRMWAREUPDATING”dialogasabovedisap-
pears.
!1 Push POWER to turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then
ON again.
!2Dependingontheupdate,oneortwodialogboxes
as at left appear on the IC-7700 display in se-
quence.
RWARNING! NEVER turn the IC-7700 power
OFF at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!3 After the dialog disappears, the firmware update is
completed and normal operation screen appears.
Please wait for 10sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
Please wait for 25sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
TRX-DSP UPDATING...SCOPE-DSP UPDATING...
Firmware up dating for the main CPU is completed.
The sub CPU and/or DSP firmware update will start automatically depending on the updated contents,
and this will take approx. 2 minutes.
Turn the IC-7700 power OFF, then ON again with [POWER] switch.
After turning the power ON, the IC-7700 will work with the updated firmware.
DO NOT turn the IC-7700 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears.
Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.
IC-7700 IP Address
IC-7700 IP Address
Firmware File Name
Version 1.00
(C) 2007 Icom Inc.
Firmware File Name
Connecting to the IC-7700.
Connected to the IC-7700.
Transfer in progress...
Transfer successful.
Start update.
Please wait a while.
IC-7700 Firm Utility
16
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
INSTALLATION NOTES
For amateur base station installations it is recom-
mended that the clearance in front of the antenna
array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective Iso-
tropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below
the antenna array can be determined in most cases
from the RF power at the antenna input terminals.
Differentexposurelimitshavebeenrecommendedfor
different frequencies, a relative table shows a guide-
line for installation considerations.
Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified
intermsofV/morA/mfieldsastheyarelikelytofall
within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas
may be physically short in terms of electrical length
and that the installation will require some antenna
matching device which can create local, high intensity
magnetic fields. Analysis of such installations is best
considered in association with published guidance
notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01
anditsannexesrelativetoamateurtransmitterinstal-
lations. The EC recommended limits are almost identi-
cal to the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables
existthatshowpre-calculatedsafedistancesfordiffer-
ent antenna types for different frequency bands. Fur-
ther information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.
• Typical amateur radio installation
Exposuredistanceassumesthatthepredominantra-
diation pattern is forward and that radiation downward
is at unity gain (side lobe suppression is equal to main
lobe gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna
today.Exposedpersonsareassumedtobebeneath
the antenna array and have a typical height of 1.8 m.
The figures assume the worst-case emission of con-
stant carrier.
For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power
density limits have been recommended:
10–144 MHz 2 W/sq m
EIRP clearance heights by frequency band
1 Watts 2.1 m
10 Watts 2.8 m
25 Watts 3.4 m
100 Watts 5 m
1000 Watts 12 m
Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band
100 Watts 2 m
1000 Watts 6.5 m
10,000 Watts 20 m
100,000 Watts 65 m
In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-
mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-
mendation limits are specified as an average during 6
minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long
periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a
timer circuit automatically cuts off the transmitter after
1–2 minutes etc.
Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM
etc. have a lower ‘average output power and the as-
sessed risk is even lower.
VersionsoftheIC-7700whichdisplaythe
“CE” symbol on the serial number label,
comply with the essential requirements of
the Radio and Telecommunications Termi-
nal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and
the restriction of the use of certain hazard-
ous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment Directive, 2011/65/EU.
This warning symbol indicates that this
equipment operates in non-harmonised fre-
quency bands and/or may be subject to li-
censing conditions in the country of use. Be
sure to check that you have the correct ver-
sion of this radio or the correct program-
ming of this radio, to comply with national
licensing requirement.
• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)
ABOUT CE
1 Austria AT
2 Belgium BE
3 Bulgaria BG
4 Croatia HR
5 Czech Republic CZ
6 Cyprus CY
7 Denmark DK
8 Estonia EE
9 Finland FI
10 France FR
11 Germany DE
12 Greece GR
13 Hungary HU
14 Iceland IS
15 Ireland IE
16 Italy IT
17 Latvia LV
18 Liechtenstein LI
19 Lithuania LT
20 Luxembourg LU
21 Malta MT
22 Netherlands NL
23 Norway NO
24 Poland PL
25 Portugal PT
26 Romania RO
27 Slovakia SK
28 Slovenia SI
29 Spain ES
30 Sweden SE
31 Switzerland CH
32 Turkey TR
33 United Kingdom GB
Country Codes Country Codes
ABOUT CE
DECLARATION
OF CONFORMITY
We Icom Inc. Japan
1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku,
Osaka 547-0003, Japan
Kind of equipment:
Type-designation:
Signature
Authorized representative name
Place and date of issue
Version (where applicable):
Y. Furukawa
General Manager
Icom (Europe) GmbH
Communication Equipment
Auf der Krautweide 24, 65812
Bad Soden am Taunus, Germany
HF/50 MHz ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER
i7700
19th June
2013Bad Soden
Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with
the essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications
Te rminal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable
Essential Test Suite measurements have been performed.
Declare on our sole responsibility that this
equipment complies with the restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment
Directive, 2011/65/EU.
This compliance is based on conformity with the following
harmonised standards, specifications or documents:
EN 60950-1:2006/A1:2010
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2 (2011-09)
EN 301 489-15 V1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 301 783-2 V1.2.1 (2010-07)
EN 62311:2008
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Jun. 2012
R&TTE Directive
RoHS Directive
Please record the serial number of your IC-7700 transceiver below for future servicing
reference:
Serial Number :
Date of purchase :
Place where purchased :
1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
<Intended Country of Use>
■AT ■BE ■CY ■CZ ■DK ■EE
■FI FR ■DE ■GR ■HU IE
IT LV ■LT ■LU ■MT ■NL
■PL ■PT ■SK ■SI ES SE
GB IS ■LI NO CH ■BG
■RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI ■FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
■IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ■ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR
<Intended Country of Use>
AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU ■IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
■GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR
IC-7700
#13 (Europe-01)
IC-7700
#14 (France-01)
IC-7700
#17 ( United
Kingdom-01)
IC-7700
#15 (Italy-01)
IC-7700
#16 (Spain-01)
Printed on recycled paper with soy ink.
14

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Icom IC-7700 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Icom IC-7700 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 23,8 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info